OpenCores
URL https://opencores.org/ocsvn/scarts/scarts/trunk

Subversion Repositories scarts

[/] [scarts/] [trunk/] [toolchain/] [scarts-gcc/] [gcc-4.1.1/] [gcc/] [doc/] [md.texi] - Blame information for rev 20

Go to most recent revision | Details | Compare with Previous | View Log

Line No. Rev Author Line
1 12 jlechner
@c Copyright (C) 1988, 1989, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1996, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001,
2
@c 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3
@c This is part of the GCC manual.
4
@c For copying conditions, see the file gcc.texi.
5
 
6
@ifset INTERNALS
7
@node Machine Desc
8
@chapter Machine Descriptions
9
@cindex machine descriptions
10
 
11
A machine description has two parts: a file of instruction patterns
12
(@file{.md} file) and a C header file of macro definitions.
13
 
14
The @file{.md} file for a target machine contains a pattern for each
15
instruction that the target machine supports (or at least each instruction
16
that is worth telling the compiler about).  It may also contain comments.
17
A semicolon causes the rest of the line to be a comment, unless the semicolon
18
is inside a quoted string.
19
 
20
See the next chapter for information on the C header file.
21
 
22
@menu
23
* Overview::            How the machine description is used.
24
* Patterns::            How to write instruction patterns.
25
* Example::             An explained example of a @code{define_insn} pattern.
26
* RTL Template::        The RTL template defines what insns match a pattern.
27
* Output Template::     The output template says how to make assembler code
28
                          from such an insn.
29
* Output Statement::    For more generality, write C code to output
30
                          the assembler code.
31
* Predicates::          Controlling what kinds of operands can be used
32
                          for an insn.
33
* Constraints::         Fine-tuning operand selection.
34
* Standard Names::      Names mark patterns to use for code generation.
35
* Pattern Ordering::    When the order of patterns makes a difference.
36
* Dependent Patterns::  Having one pattern may make you need another.
37
* Jump Patterns::       Special considerations for patterns for jump insns.
38
* Looping Patterns::    How to define patterns for special looping insns.
39
* Insn Canonicalizations::Canonicalization of Instructions
40
* Expander Definitions::Generating a sequence of several RTL insns
41
                          for a standard operation.
42
* Insn Splitting::      Splitting Instructions into Multiple Instructions.
43
* Including Patterns::      Including Patterns in Machine Descriptions.
44
* Peephole Definitions::Defining machine-specific peephole optimizations.
45
* Insn Attributes::     Specifying the value of attributes for generated insns.
46
* Conditional Execution::Generating @code{define_insn} patterns for
47
                           predication.
48
* Constant Definitions::Defining symbolic constants that can be used in the
49
                        md file.
50
* Macros::              Using macros to generate patterns from a template.
51
@end menu
52
 
53
@node Overview
54
@section Overview of How the Machine Description is Used
55
 
56
There are three main conversions that happen in the compiler:
57
 
58
@enumerate
59
 
60
@item
61
The front end reads the source code and builds a parse tree.
62
 
63
@item
64
The parse tree is used to generate an RTL insn list based on named
65
instruction patterns.
66
 
67
@item
68
The insn list is matched against the RTL templates to produce assembler
69
code.
70
 
71
@end enumerate
72
 
73
For the generate pass, only the names of the insns matter, from either a
74
named @code{define_insn} or a @code{define_expand}.  The compiler will
75
choose the pattern with the right name and apply the operands according
76
to the documentation later in this chapter, without regard for the RTL
77
template or operand constraints.  Note that the names the compiler looks
78
for are hard-coded in the compiler---it will ignore unnamed patterns and
79
patterns with names it doesn't know about, but if you don't provide a
80
named pattern it needs, it will abort.
81
 
82
If a @code{define_insn} is used, the template given is inserted into the
83
insn list.  If a @code{define_expand} is used, one of three things
84
happens, based on the condition logic.  The condition logic may manually
85
create new insns for the insn list, say via @code{emit_insn()}, and
86
invoke @code{DONE}.  For certain named patterns, it may invoke @code{FAIL} to tell the
87
compiler to use an alternate way of performing that task.  If it invokes
88
neither @code{DONE} nor @code{FAIL}, the template given in the pattern
89
is inserted, as if the @code{define_expand} were a @code{define_insn}.
90
 
91
Once the insn list is generated, various optimization passes convert,
92
replace, and rearrange the insns in the insn list.  This is where the
93
@code{define_split} and @code{define_peephole} patterns get used, for
94
example.
95
 
96
Finally, the insn list's RTL is matched up with the RTL templates in the
97
@code{define_insn} patterns, and those patterns are used to emit the
98
final assembly code.  For this purpose, each named @code{define_insn}
99
acts like it's unnamed, since the names are ignored.
100
 
101
@node Patterns
102
@section Everything about Instruction Patterns
103
@cindex patterns
104
@cindex instruction patterns
105
 
106
@findex define_insn
107
Each instruction pattern contains an incomplete RTL expression, with pieces
108
to be filled in later, operand constraints that restrict how the pieces can
109
be filled in, and an output pattern or C code to generate the assembler
110
output, all wrapped up in a @code{define_insn} expression.
111
 
112
A @code{define_insn} is an RTL expression containing four or five operands:
113
 
114
@enumerate
115
@item
116
An optional name.  The presence of a name indicate that this instruction
117
pattern can perform a certain standard job for the RTL-generation
118
pass of the compiler.  This pass knows certain names and will use
119
the instruction patterns with those names, if the names are defined
120
in the machine description.
121
 
122
The absence of a name is indicated by writing an empty string
123
where the name should go.  Nameless instruction patterns are never
124
used for generating RTL code, but they may permit several simpler insns
125
to be combined later on.
126
 
127
Names that are not thus known and used in RTL-generation have no
128
effect; they are equivalent to no name at all.
129
 
130
For the purpose of debugging the compiler, you may also specify a
131
name beginning with the @samp{*} character.  Such a name is used only
132
for identifying the instruction in RTL dumps; it is entirely equivalent
133
to having a nameless pattern for all other purposes.
134
 
135
@item
136
The @dfn{RTL template} (@pxref{RTL Template}) is a vector of incomplete
137
RTL expressions which show what the instruction should look like.  It is
138
incomplete because it may contain @code{match_operand},
139
@code{match_operator}, and @code{match_dup} expressions that stand for
140
operands of the instruction.
141
 
142
If the vector has only one element, that element is the template for the
143
instruction pattern.  If the vector has multiple elements, then the
144
instruction pattern is a @code{parallel} expression containing the
145
elements described.
146
 
147
@item
148
@cindex pattern conditions
149
@cindex conditions, in patterns
150
A condition.  This is a string which contains a C expression that is
151
the final test to decide whether an insn body matches this pattern.
152
 
153
@cindex named patterns and conditions
154
For a named pattern, the condition (if present) may not depend on
155
the data in the insn being matched, but only the target-machine-type
156
flags.  The compiler needs to test these conditions during
157
initialization in order to learn exactly which named instructions are
158
available in a particular run.
159
 
160
@findex operands
161
For nameless patterns, the condition is applied only when matching an
162
individual insn, and only after the insn has matched the pattern's
163
recognition template.  The insn's operands may be found in the vector
164
@code{operands}.  For an insn where the condition has once matched, it
165
can't be used to control register allocation, for example by excluding
166
certain hard registers or hard register combinations.
167
 
168
@item
169
The @dfn{output template}: a string that says how to output matching
170
insns as assembler code.  @samp{%} in this string specifies where
171
to substitute the value of an operand.  @xref{Output Template}.
172
 
173
When simple substitution isn't general enough, you can specify a piece
174
of C code to compute the output.  @xref{Output Statement}.
175
 
176
@item
177
Optionally, a vector containing the values of attributes for insns matching
178
this pattern.  @xref{Insn Attributes}.
179
@end enumerate
180
 
181
@node Example
182
@section Example of @code{define_insn}
183
@cindex @code{define_insn} example
184
 
185
Here is an actual example of an instruction pattern, for the 68000/68020.
186
 
187
@smallexample
188
(define_insn "tstsi"
189
  [(set (cc0)
190
        (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "rm"))]
191
  ""
192
  "*
193
@{
194
  if (TARGET_68020 || ! ADDRESS_REG_P (operands[0]))
195
    return \"tstl %0\";
196
  return \"cmpl #0,%0\";
197
@}")
198
@end smallexample
199
 
200
@noindent
201
This can also be written using braced strings:
202
 
203
@smallexample
204
(define_insn "tstsi"
205
  [(set (cc0)
206
        (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "rm"))]
207
  ""
208
@{
209
  if (TARGET_68020 || ! ADDRESS_REG_P (operands[0]))
210
    return "tstl %0";
211
  return "cmpl #0,%0";
212
@})
213
@end smallexample
214
 
215
This is an instruction that sets the condition codes based on the value of
216
a general operand.  It has no condition, so any insn whose RTL description
217
has the form shown may be handled according to this pattern.  The name
218
@samp{tstsi} means ``test a @code{SImode} value'' and tells the RTL generation
219
pass that, when it is necessary to test such a value, an insn to do so
220
can be constructed using this pattern.
221
 
222
The output control string is a piece of C code which chooses which
223
output template to return based on the kind of operand and the specific
224
type of CPU for which code is being generated.
225
 
226
@samp{"rm"} is an operand constraint.  Its meaning is explained below.
227
 
228
@node RTL Template
229
@section RTL Template
230
@cindex RTL insn template
231
@cindex generating insns
232
@cindex insns, generating
233
@cindex recognizing insns
234
@cindex insns, recognizing
235
 
236
The RTL template is used to define which insns match the particular pattern
237
and how to find their operands.  For named patterns, the RTL template also
238
says how to construct an insn from specified operands.
239
 
240
Construction involves substituting specified operands into a copy of the
241
template.  Matching involves determining the values that serve as the
242
operands in the insn being matched.  Both of these activities are
243
controlled by special expression types that direct matching and
244
substitution of the operands.
245
 
246
@table @code
247
@findex match_operand
248
@item (match_operand:@var{m} @var{n} @var{predicate} @var{constraint})
249
This expression is a placeholder for operand number @var{n} of
250
the insn.  When constructing an insn, operand number @var{n}
251
will be substituted at this point.  When matching an insn, whatever
252
appears at this position in the insn will be taken as operand
253
number @var{n}; but it must satisfy @var{predicate} or this instruction
254
pattern will not match at all.
255
 
256
Operand numbers must be chosen consecutively counting from zero in
257
each instruction pattern.  There may be only one @code{match_operand}
258
expression in the pattern for each operand number.  Usually operands
259
are numbered in the order of appearance in @code{match_operand}
260
expressions.  In the case of a @code{define_expand}, any operand numbers
261
used only in @code{match_dup} expressions have higher values than all
262
other operand numbers.
263
 
264
@var{predicate} is a string that is the name of a function that
265
accepts two arguments, an expression and a machine mode.
266
@xref{Predicates}.  During matching, the function will be called with
267
the putative operand as the expression and @var{m} as the mode
268
argument (if @var{m} is not specified, @code{VOIDmode} will be used,
269
which normally causes @var{predicate} to accept any mode).  If it
270
returns zero, this instruction pattern fails to match.
271
@var{predicate} may be an empty string; then it means no test is to be
272
done on the operand, so anything which occurs in this position is
273
valid.
274
 
275
Most of the time, @var{predicate} will reject modes other than @var{m}---but
276
not always.  For example, the predicate @code{address_operand} uses
277
@var{m} as the mode of memory ref that the address should be valid for.
278
Many predicates accept @code{const_int} nodes even though their mode is
279
@code{VOIDmode}.
280
 
281
@var{constraint} controls reloading and the choice of the best register
282
class to use for a value, as explained later (@pxref{Constraints}).
283
If the constraint would be an empty string, it can be omitted.
284
 
285
People are often unclear on the difference between the constraint and the
286
predicate.  The predicate helps decide whether a given insn matches the
287
pattern.  The constraint plays no role in this decision; instead, it
288
controls various decisions in the case of an insn which does match.
289
 
290
@findex match_scratch
291
@item (match_scratch:@var{m} @var{n} @var{constraint})
292
This expression is also a placeholder for operand number @var{n}
293
and indicates that operand must be a @code{scratch} or @code{reg}
294
expression.
295
 
296
When matching patterns, this is equivalent to
297
 
298
@smallexample
299
(match_operand:@var{m} @var{n} "scratch_operand" @var{pred})
300
@end smallexample
301
 
302
but, when generating RTL, it produces a (@code{scratch}:@var{m})
303
expression.
304
 
305
If the last few expressions in a @code{parallel} are @code{clobber}
306
expressions whose operands are either a hard register or
307
@code{match_scratch}, the combiner can add or delete them when
308
necessary.  @xref{Side Effects}.
309
 
310
@findex match_dup
311
@item (match_dup @var{n})
312
This expression is also a placeholder for operand number @var{n}.
313
It is used when the operand needs to appear more than once in the
314
insn.
315
 
316
In construction, @code{match_dup} acts just like @code{match_operand}:
317
the operand is substituted into the insn being constructed.  But in
318
matching, @code{match_dup} behaves differently.  It assumes that operand
319
number @var{n} has already been determined by a @code{match_operand}
320
appearing earlier in the recognition template, and it matches only an
321
identical-looking expression.
322
 
323
Note that @code{match_dup} should not be used to tell the compiler that
324
a particular register is being used for two operands (example:
325
@code{add} that adds one register to another; the second register is
326
both an input operand and the output operand).  Use a matching
327
constraint (@pxref{Simple Constraints}) for those.  @code{match_dup} is for the cases where one
328
operand is used in two places in the template, such as an instruction
329
that computes both a quotient and a remainder, where the opcode takes
330
two input operands but the RTL template has to refer to each of those
331
twice; once for the quotient pattern and once for the remainder pattern.
332
 
333
@findex match_operator
334
@item (match_operator:@var{m} @var{n} @var{predicate} [@var{operands}@dots{}])
335
This pattern is a kind of placeholder for a variable RTL expression
336
code.
337
 
338
When constructing an insn, it stands for an RTL expression whose
339
expression code is taken from that of operand @var{n}, and whose
340
operands are constructed from the patterns @var{operands}.
341
 
342
When matching an expression, it matches an expression if the function
343
@var{predicate} returns nonzero on that expression @emph{and} the
344
patterns @var{operands} match the operands of the expression.
345
 
346
Suppose that the function @code{commutative_operator} is defined as
347
follows, to match any expression whose operator is one of the
348
commutative arithmetic operators of RTL and whose mode is @var{mode}:
349
 
350
@smallexample
351
int
352
commutative_integer_operator (x, mode)
353
     rtx x;
354
     enum machine_mode mode;
355
@{
356
  enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
357
  if (GET_MODE (x) != mode)
358
    return 0;
359
  return (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == RTX_COMM_ARITH
360
          || code == EQ || code == NE);
361
@}
362
@end smallexample
363
 
364
Then the following pattern will match any RTL expression consisting
365
of a commutative operator applied to two general operands:
366
 
367
@smallexample
368
(match_operator:SI 3 "commutative_operator"
369
  [(match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "g")
370
   (match_operand:SI 2 "general_operand" "g")])
371
@end smallexample
372
 
373
Here the vector @code{[@var{operands}@dots{}]} contains two patterns
374
because the expressions to be matched all contain two operands.
375
 
376
When this pattern does match, the two operands of the commutative
377
operator are recorded as operands 1 and 2 of the insn.  (This is done
378
by the two instances of @code{match_operand}.)  Operand 3 of the insn
379
will be the entire commutative expression: use @code{GET_CODE
380
(operands[3])} to see which commutative operator was used.
381
 
382
The machine mode @var{m} of @code{match_operator} works like that of
383
@code{match_operand}: it is passed as the second argument to the
384
predicate function, and that function is solely responsible for
385
deciding whether the expression to be matched ``has'' that mode.
386
 
387
When constructing an insn, argument 3 of the gen-function will specify
388
the operation (i.e.@: the expression code) for the expression to be
389
made.  It should be an RTL expression, whose expression code is copied
390
into a new expression whose operands are arguments 1 and 2 of the
391
gen-function.  The subexpressions of argument 3 are not used;
392
only its expression code matters.
393
 
394
When @code{match_operator} is used in a pattern for matching an insn,
395
it usually best if the operand number of the @code{match_operator}
396
is higher than that of the actual operands of the insn.  This improves
397
register allocation because the register allocator often looks at
398
operands 1 and 2 of insns to see if it can do register tying.
399
 
400
There is no way to specify constraints in @code{match_operator}.  The
401
operand of the insn which corresponds to the @code{match_operator}
402
never has any constraints because it is never reloaded as a whole.
403
However, if parts of its @var{operands} are matched by
404
@code{match_operand} patterns, those parts may have constraints of
405
their own.
406
 
407
@findex match_op_dup
408
@item (match_op_dup:@var{m} @var{n}[@var{operands}@dots{}])
409
Like @code{match_dup}, except that it applies to operators instead of
410
operands.  When constructing an insn, operand number @var{n} will be
411
substituted at this point.  But in matching, @code{match_op_dup} behaves
412
differently.  It assumes that operand number @var{n} has already been
413
determined by a @code{match_operator} appearing earlier in the
414
recognition template, and it matches only an identical-looking
415
expression.
416
 
417
@findex match_parallel
418
@item (match_parallel @var{n} @var{predicate} [@var{subpat}@dots{}])
419
This pattern is a placeholder for an insn that consists of a
420
@code{parallel} expression with a variable number of elements.  This
421
expression should only appear at the top level of an insn pattern.
422
 
423
When constructing an insn, operand number @var{n} will be substituted at
424
this point.  When matching an insn, it matches if the body of the insn
425
is a @code{parallel} expression with at least as many elements as the
426
vector of @var{subpat} expressions in the @code{match_parallel}, if each
427
@var{subpat} matches the corresponding element of the @code{parallel},
428
@emph{and} the function @var{predicate} returns nonzero on the
429
@code{parallel} that is the body of the insn.  It is the responsibility
430
of the predicate to validate elements of the @code{parallel} beyond
431
those listed in the @code{match_parallel}.
432
 
433
A typical use of @code{match_parallel} is to match load and store
434
multiple expressions, which can contain a variable number of elements
435
in a @code{parallel}.  For example,
436
 
437
@smallexample
438
(define_insn ""
439
  [(match_parallel 0 "load_multiple_operation"
440
     [(set (match_operand:SI 1 "gpc_reg_operand" "=r")
441
           (match_operand:SI 2 "memory_operand" "m"))
442
      (use (reg:SI 179))
443
      (clobber (reg:SI 179))])]
444
  ""
445
  "loadm 0,0,%1,%2")
446
@end smallexample
447
 
448
This example comes from @file{a29k.md}.  The function
449
@code{load_multiple_operation} is defined in @file{a29k.c} and checks
450
that subsequent elements in the @code{parallel} are the same as the
451
@code{set} in the pattern, except that they are referencing subsequent
452
registers and memory locations.
453
 
454
An insn that matches this pattern might look like:
455
 
456
@smallexample
457
(parallel
458
 [(set (reg:SI 20) (mem:SI (reg:SI 100)))
459
  (use (reg:SI 179))
460
  (clobber (reg:SI 179))
461
  (set (reg:SI 21)
462
       (mem:SI (plus:SI (reg:SI 100)
463
                        (const_int 4))))
464
  (set (reg:SI 22)
465
       (mem:SI (plus:SI (reg:SI 100)
466
                        (const_int 8))))])
467
@end smallexample
468
 
469
@findex match_par_dup
470
@item (match_par_dup @var{n} [@var{subpat}@dots{}])
471
Like @code{match_op_dup}, but for @code{match_parallel} instead of
472
@code{match_operator}.
473
 
474
@end table
475
 
476
@node Output Template
477
@section Output Templates and Operand Substitution
478
@cindex output templates
479
@cindex operand substitution
480
 
481
@cindex @samp{%} in template
482
@cindex percent sign
483
The @dfn{output template} is a string which specifies how to output the
484
assembler code for an instruction pattern.  Most of the template is a
485
fixed string which is output literally.  The character @samp{%} is used
486
to specify where to substitute an operand; it can also be used to
487
identify places where different variants of the assembler require
488
different syntax.
489
 
490
In the simplest case, a @samp{%} followed by a digit @var{n} says to output
491
operand @var{n} at that point in the string.
492
 
493
@samp{%} followed by a letter and a digit says to output an operand in an
494
alternate fashion.  Four letters have standard, built-in meanings described
495
below.  The machine description macro @code{PRINT_OPERAND} can define
496
additional letters with nonstandard meanings.
497
 
498
@samp{%c@var{digit}} can be used to substitute an operand that is a
499
constant value without the syntax that normally indicates an immediate
500
operand.
501
 
502
@samp{%n@var{digit}} is like @samp{%c@var{digit}} except that the value of
503
the constant is negated before printing.
504
 
505
@samp{%a@var{digit}} can be used to substitute an operand as if it were a
506
memory reference, with the actual operand treated as the address.  This may
507
be useful when outputting a ``load address'' instruction, because often the
508
assembler syntax for such an instruction requires you to write the operand
509
as if it were a memory reference.
510
 
511
@samp{%l@var{digit}} is used to substitute a @code{label_ref} into a jump
512
instruction.
513
 
514
@samp{%=} outputs a number which is unique to each instruction in the
515
entire compilation.  This is useful for making local labels to be
516
referred to more than once in a single template that generates multiple
517
assembler instructions.
518
 
519
@samp{%} followed by a punctuation character specifies a substitution that
520
does not use an operand.  Only one case is standard: @samp{%%} outputs a
521
@samp{%} into the assembler code.  Other nonstandard cases can be
522
defined in the @code{PRINT_OPERAND} macro.  You must also define
523
which punctuation characters are valid with the
524
@code{PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P} macro.
525
 
526
@cindex \
527
@cindex backslash
528
The template may generate multiple assembler instructions.  Write the text
529
for the instructions, with @samp{\;} between them.
530
 
531
@cindex matching operands
532
When the RTL contains two operands which are required by constraint to match
533
each other, the output template must refer only to the lower-numbered operand.
534
Matching operands are not always identical, and the rest of the compiler
535
arranges to put the proper RTL expression for printing into the lower-numbered
536
operand.
537
 
538
One use of nonstandard letters or punctuation following @samp{%} is to
539
distinguish between different assembler languages for the same machine; for
540
example, Motorola syntax versus MIT syntax for the 68000.  Motorola syntax
541
requires periods in most opcode names, while MIT syntax does not.  For
542
example, the opcode @samp{movel} in MIT syntax is @samp{move.l} in Motorola
543
syntax.  The same file of patterns is used for both kinds of output syntax,
544
but the character sequence @samp{%.} is used in each place where Motorola
545
syntax wants a period.  The @code{PRINT_OPERAND} macro for Motorola syntax
546
defines the sequence to output a period; the macro for MIT syntax defines
547
it to do nothing.
548
 
549
@cindex @code{#} in template
550
As a special case, a template consisting of the single character @code{#}
551
instructs the compiler to first split the insn, and then output the
552
resulting instructions separately.  This helps eliminate redundancy in the
553
output templates.   If you have a @code{define_insn} that needs to emit
554
multiple assembler instructions, and there is an matching @code{define_split}
555
already defined, then you can simply use @code{#} as the output template
556
instead of writing an output template that emits the multiple assembler
557
instructions.
558
 
559
If the macro @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} is defined, you can use construct
560
of the form @samp{@{option0|option1|option2@}} in the templates.  These
561
describe multiple variants of assembler language syntax.
562
@xref{Instruction Output}.
563
 
564
@node Output Statement
565
@section C Statements for Assembler Output
566
@cindex output statements
567
@cindex C statements for assembler output
568
@cindex generating assembler output
569
 
570
Often a single fixed template string cannot produce correct and efficient
571
assembler code for all the cases that are recognized by a single
572
instruction pattern.  For example, the opcodes may depend on the kinds of
573
operands; or some unfortunate combinations of operands may require extra
574
machine instructions.
575
 
576
If the output control string starts with a @samp{@@}, then it is actually
577
a series of templates, each on a separate line.  (Blank lines and
578
leading spaces and tabs are ignored.)  The templates correspond to the
579
pattern's constraint alternatives (@pxref{Multi-Alternative}).  For example,
580
if a target machine has a two-address add instruction @samp{addr} to add
581
into a register and another @samp{addm} to add a register to memory, you
582
might write this pattern:
583
 
584
@smallexample
585
(define_insn "addsi3"
586
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=r,m")
587
        (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "0,0")
588
                 (match_operand:SI 2 "general_operand" "g,r")))]
589
  ""
590
  "@@
591
   addr %2,%0
592
   addm %2,%0")
593
@end smallexample
594
 
595
@cindex @code{*} in template
596
@cindex asterisk in template
597
If the output control string starts with a @samp{*}, then it is not an
598
output template but rather a piece of C program that should compute a
599
template.  It should execute a @code{return} statement to return the
600
template-string you want.  Most such templates use C string literals, which
601
require doublequote characters to delimit them.  To include these
602
doublequote characters in the string, prefix each one with @samp{\}.
603
 
604
If the output control string is written as a brace block instead of a
605
double-quoted string, it is automatically assumed to be C code.  In that
606
case, it is not necessary to put in a leading asterisk, or to escape the
607
doublequotes surrounding C string literals.
608
 
609
The operands may be found in the array @code{operands}, whose C data type
610
is @code{rtx []}.
611
 
612
It is very common to select different ways of generating assembler code
613
based on whether an immediate operand is within a certain range.  Be
614
careful when doing this, because the result of @code{INTVAL} is an
615
integer on the host machine.  If the host machine has more bits in an
616
@code{int} than the target machine has in the mode in which the constant
617
will be used, then some of the bits you get from @code{INTVAL} will be
618
superfluous.  For proper results, you must carefully disregard the
619
values of those bits.
620
 
621
@findex output_asm_insn
622
It is possible to output an assembler instruction and then go on to output
623
or compute more of them, using the subroutine @code{output_asm_insn}.  This
624
receives two arguments: a template-string and a vector of operands.  The
625
vector may be @code{operands}, or it may be another array of @code{rtx}
626
that you declare locally and initialize yourself.
627
 
628
@findex which_alternative
629
When an insn pattern has multiple alternatives in its constraints, often
630
the appearance of the assembler code is determined mostly by which alternative
631
was matched.  When this is so, the C code can test the variable
632
@code{which_alternative}, which is the ordinal number of the alternative
633
that was actually satisfied (0 for the first, 1 for the second alternative,
634
etc.).
635
 
636
For example, suppose there are two opcodes for storing zero, @samp{clrreg}
637
for registers and @samp{clrmem} for memory locations.  Here is how
638
a pattern could use @code{which_alternative} to choose between them:
639
 
640
@smallexample
641
(define_insn ""
642
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=r,m")
643
        (const_int 0))]
644
  ""
645
  @{
646
  return (which_alternative == 0
647
          ? "clrreg %0" : "clrmem %0");
648
  @})
649
@end smallexample
650
 
651
The example above, where the assembler code to generate was
652
@emph{solely} determined by the alternative, could also have been specified
653
as follows, having the output control string start with a @samp{@@}:
654
 
655
@smallexample
656
@group
657
(define_insn ""
658
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=r,m")
659
        (const_int 0))]
660
  ""
661
  "@@
662
   clrreg %0
663
   clrmem %0")
664
@end group
665
@end smallexample
666
 
667
@node Predicates
668
@section Predicates
669
@cindex predicates
670
@cindex operand predicates
671
@cindex operator predicates
672
 
673
A predicate determines whether a @code{match_operand} or
674
@code{match_operator} expression matches, and therefore whether the
675
surrounding instruction pattern will be used for that combination of
676
operands.  GCC has a number of machine-independent predicates, and you
677
can define machine-specific predicates as needed.  By convention,
678
predicates used with @code{match_operand} have names that end in
679
@samp{_operand}, and those used with @code{match_operator} have names
680
that end in @samp{_operator}.
681
 
682
All predicates are Boolean functions (in the mathematical sense) of
683
two arguments: the RTL expression that is being considered at that
684
position in the instruction pattern, and the machine mode that the
685
@code{match_operand} or @code{match_operator} specifies.  In this
686
section, the first argument is called @var{op} and the second argument
687
@var{mode}.  Predicates can be called from C as ordinary two-argument
688
functions; this can be useful in output templates or other
689
machine-specific code.
690
 
691
Operand predicates can allow operands that are not actually acceptable
692
to the hardware, as long as the constraints give reload the ability to
693
fix them up (@pxref{Constraints}).  However, GCC will usually generate
694
better code if the predicates specify the requirements of the machine
695
instructions as closely as possible.  Reload cannot fix up operands
696
that must be constants (``immediate operands''); you must use a
697
predicate that allows only constants, or else enforce the requirement
698
in the extra condition.
699
 
700
@cindex predicates and machine modes
701
@cindex normal predicates
702
@cindex special predicates
703
Most predicates handle their @var{mode} argument in a uniform manner.
704
If @var{mode} is @code{VOIDmode} (unspecified), then @var{op} can have
705
any mode.  If @var{mode} is anything else, then @var{op} must have the
706
same mode, unless @var{op} is a @code{CONST_INT} or integer
707
@code{CONST_DOUBLE}.  These RTL expressions always have
708
@code{VOIDmode}, so it would be counterproductive to check that their
709
mode matches.  Instead, predicates that accept @code{CONST_INT} and/or
710
integer @code{CONST_DOUBLE} check that the value stored in the
711
constant will fit in the requested mode.
712
 
713
Predicates with this behavior are called @dfn{normal}.
714
@command{genrecog} can optimize the instruction recognizer based on
715
knowledge of how normal predicates treat modes.  It can also diagnose
716
certain kinds of common errors in the use of normal predicates; for
717
instance, it is almost always an error to use a normal predicate
718
without specifying a mode.
719
 
720
Predicates that do something different with their @var{mode} argument
721
are called @dfn{special}.  The generic predicates
722
@code{address_operand} and @code{pmode_register_operand} are special
723
predicates.  @command{genrecog} does not do any optimizations or
724
diagnosis when special predicates are used.
725
 
726
@menu
727
* Machine-Independent Predicates::  Predicates available to all back ends.
728
* Defining Predicates::             How to write machine-specific predicate
729
                                    functions.
730
@end menu
731
 
732
@node Machine-Independent Predicates
733
@subsection Machine-Independent Predicates
734
@cindex machine-independent predicates
735
@cindex generic predicates
736
 
737
These are the generic predicates available to all back ends.  They are
738
defined in @file{recog.c}.  The first category of predicates allow
739
only constant, or @dfn{immediate}, operands.
740
 
741
@defun immediate_operand
742
This predicate allows any sort of constant that fits in @var{mode}.
743
It is an appropriate choice for instructions that take operands that
744
must be constant.
745
@end defun
746
 
747
@defun const_int_operand
748
This predicate allows any @code{CONST_INT} expression that fits in
749
@var{mode}.  It is an appropriate choice for an immediate operand that
750
does not allow a symbol or label.
751
@end defun
752
 
753
@defun const_double_operand
754
This predicate accepts any @code{CONST_DOUBLE} expression that has
755
exactly @var{mode}.  If @var{mode} is @code{VOIDmode}, it will also
756
accept @code{CONST_INT}.  It is intended for immediate floating point
757
constants.
758
@end defun
759
 
760
@noindent
761
The second category of predicates allow only some kind of machine
762
register.
763
 
764
@defun register_operand
765
This predicate allows any @code{REG} or @code{SUBREG} expression that
766
is valid for @var{mode}.  It is often suitable for arithmetic
767
instruction operands on a RISC machine.
768
@end defun
769
 
770
@defun pmode_register_operand
771
This is a slight variant on @code{register_operand} which works around
772
a limitation in the machine-description reader.
773
 
774
@smallexample
775
(match_operand @var{n} "pmode_register_operand" @var{constraint})
776
@end smallexample
777
 
778
@noindent
779
means exactly what
780
 
781
@smallexample
782
(match_operand:P @var{n} "register_operand" @var{constraint})
783
@end smallexample
784
 
785
@noindent
786
would mean, if the machine-description reader accepted @samp{:P}
787
mode suffixes.  Unfortunately, it cannot, because @code{Pmode} is an
788
alias for some other mode, and might vary with machine-specific
789
options.  @xref{Misc}.
790
@end defun
791
 
792
@defun scratch_operand
793
This predicate allows hard registers and @code{SCRATCH} expressions,
794
but not pseudo-registers.  It is used internally by @code{match_scratch};
795
it should not be used directly.
796
@end defun
797
 
798
@noindent
799
The third category of predicates allow only some kind of memory reference.
800
 
801
@defun memory_operand
802
This predicate allows any valid reference to a quantity of mode
803
@var{mode} in memory, as determined by the weak form of
804
@code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS} (@pxref{Addressing Modes}).
805
@end defun
806
 
807
@defun address_operand
808
This predicate is a little unusual; it allows any operand that is a
809
valid expression for the @emph{address} of a quantity of mode
810
@var{mode}, again determined by the weak form of
811
@code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS}.  To first order, if
812
@samp{@w{(mem:@var{mode} (@var{exp}))}} is acceptable to
813
@code{memory_operand}, then @var{exp} is acceptable to
814
@code{address_operand}.  Note that @var{exp} does not necessarily have
815
the mode @var{mode}.
816
@end defun
817
 
818
@defun indirect_operand
819
This is a stricter form of @code{memory_operand} which allows only
820
memory references with a @code{general_operand} as the address
821
expression.  New uses of this predicate are discouraged, because
822
@code{general_operand} is very permissive, so it's hard to tell what
823
an @code{indirect_operand} does or does not allow.  If a target has
824
different requirements for memory operands for different instructions,
825
it is better to define target-specific predicates which enforce the
826
hardware's requirements explicitly.
827
@end defun
828
 
829
@defun push_operand
830
This predicate allows a memory reference suitable for pushing a value
831
onto the stack.  This will be a @code{MEM} which refers to
832
@code{stack_pointer_rtx}, with a side-effect in its address expression
833
(@pxref{Incdec}); which one is determined by the
834
@code{STACK_PUSH_CODE} macro (@pxref{Frame Layout}).
835
@end defun
836
 
837
@defun pop_operand
838
This predicate allows a memory reference suitable for popping a value
839
off the stack.  Again, this will be a @code{MEM} referring to
840
@code{stack_pointer_rtx}, with a side-effect in its address
841
expression.  However, this time @code{STACK_POP_CODE} is expected.
842
@end defun
843
 
844
@noindent
845
The fourth category of predicates allow some combination of the above
846
operands.
847
 
848
@defun nonmemory_operand
849
This predicate allows any immediate or register operand valid for @var{mode}.
850
@end defun
851
 
852
@defun nonimmediate_operand
853
This predicate allows any register or memory operand valid for @var{mode}.
854
@end defun
855
 
856
@defun general_operand
857
This predicate allows any immediate, register, or memory operand
858
valid for @var{mode}.
859
@end defun
860
 
861
@noindent
862
Finally, there is one generic operator predicate.
863
 
864
@defun comparison_operator
865
This predicate matches any expression which performs an arithmetic
866
comparison in @var{mode}; that is, @code{COMPARISON_P} is true for the
867
expression code.
868
@end defun
869
 
870
@node Defining Predicates
871
@subsection Defining Machine-Specific Predicates
872
@cindex defining predicates
873
@findex define_predicate
874
@findex define_special_predicate
875
 
876
Many machines have requirements for their operands that cannot be
877
expressed precisely using the generic predicates.  You can define
878
additional predicates using @code{define_predicate} and
879
@code{define_special_predicate} expressions.  These expressions have
880
three operands:
881
 
882
@itemize @bullet
883
@item
884
The name of the predicate, as it will be referred to in
885
@code{match_operand} or @code{match_operator} expressions.
886
 
887
@item
888
An RTL expression which evaluates to true if the predicate allows the
889
operand @var{op}, false if it does not.  This expression can only use
890
the following RTL codes:
891
 
892
@table @code
893
@item MATCH_OPERAND
894
When written inside a predicate expression, a @code{MATCH_OPERAND}
895
expression evaluates to true if the predicate it names would allow
896
@var{op}.  The operand number and constraint are ignored.  Due to
897
limitations in @command{genrecog}, you can only refer to generic
898
predicates and predicates that have already been defined.
899
 
900
@item MATCH_CODE
901
This expression has one operand, a string constant containing a
902
comma-separated list of RTX code names (in lower case).  It evaluates
903
to true if @var{op} has any of the listed codes.
904
 
905
@item MATCH_TEST
906
This expression has one operand, a string constant containing a C
907
expression.  The predicate's arguments, @var{op} and @var{mode}, are
908
available with those names in the C expression.  The @code{MATCH_TEST}
909
evaluates to true if the C expression evaluates to a nonzero value.
910
@code{MATCH_TEST} expressions must not have side effects.
911
 
912
@item  AND
913
@itemx IOR
914
@itemx NOT
915
@itemx IF_THEN_ELSE
916
The basic @samp{MATCH_} expressions can be combined using these
917
logical operators, which have the semantics of the C operators
918
@samp{&&}, @samp{||}, @samp{!}, and @samp{@w{? :}} respectively.
919
@end table
920
 
921
@item
922
An optional block of C code, which should execute
923
@samp{@w{return true}} if the predicate is found to match and
924
@samp{@w{return false}} if it does not.  It must not have any side
925
effects.  The predicate arguments, @var{op} and @var{mode}, are
926
available with those names.
927
 
928
If a code block is present in a predicate definition, then the RTL
929
expression must evaluate to true @emph{and} the code block must
930
execute @samp{@w{return true}} for the predicate to allow the operand.
931
The RTL expression is evaluated first; do not re-check anything in the
932
code block that was checked in the RTL expression.
933
@end itemize
934
 
935
The program @command{genrecog} scans @code{define_predicate} and
936
@code{define_special_predicate} expressions to determine which RTX
937
codes are possibly allowed.  You should always make this explicit in
938
the RTL predicate expression, using @code{MATCH_OPERAND} and
939
@code{MATCH_CODE}.
940
 
941
Here is an example of a simple predicate definition, from the IA64
942
machine description:
943
 
944
@smallexample
945
@group
946
;; @r{True if @var{op} is a @code{SYMBOL_REF} which refers to the sdata section.}
947
(define_predicate "small_addr_symbolic_operand"
948
  (and (match_code "symbol_ref")
949
       (match_test "SYMBOL_REF_SMALL_ADDR_P (op)")))
950
@end group
951
@end smallexample
952
 
953
@noindent
954
And here is another, showing the use of the C block.
955
 
956
@smallexample
957
@group
958
;; @r{True if @var{op} is a register operand that is (or could be) a GR reg.}
959
(define_predicate "gr_register_operand"
960
  (match_operand 0 "register_operand")
961
@{
962
  unsigned int regno;
963
  if (GET_CODE (op) == SUBREG)
964
    op = SUBREG_REG (op);
965
 
966
  regno = REGNO (op);
967
  return (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER || GENERAL_REGNO_P (regno));
968
@})
969
@end group
970
@end smallexample
971
 
972
Predicates written with @code{define_predicate} automatically include
973
a test that @var{mode} is @code{VOIDmode}, or @var{op} has the same
974
mode as @var{mode}, or @var{op} is a @code{CONST_INT} or
975
@code{CONST_DOUBLE}.  They do @emph{not} check specifically for
976
integer @code{CONST_DOUBLE}, nor do they test that the value of either
977
kind of constant fits in the requested mode.  This is because
978
target-specific predicates that take constants usually have to do more
979
stringent value checks anyway.  If you need the exact same treatment
980
of @code{CONST_INT} or @code{CONST_DOUBLE} that the generic predicates
981
provide, use a @code{MATCH_OPERAND} subexpression to call
982
@code{const_int_operand}, @code{const_double_operand}, or
983
@code{immediate_operand}.
984
 
985
Predicates written with @code{define_special_predicate} do not get any
986
automatic mode checks, and are treated as having special mode handling
987
by @command{genrecog}.
988
 
989
The program @command{genpreds} is responsible for generating code to
990
test predicates.  It also writes a header file containing function
991
declarations for all machine-specific predicates.  It is not necessary
992
to declare these predicates in @file{@var{cpu}-protos.h}.
993
@end ifset
994
 
995
@c Most of this node appears by itself (in a different place) even
996
@c when the INTERNALS flag is clear.  Passages that require the internals
997
@c manual's context are conditionalized to appear only in the internals manual.
998
@ifset INTERNALS
999
@node Constraints
1000
@section Operand Constraints
1001
@cindex operand constraints
1002
@cindex constraints
1003
 
1004
Each @code{match_operand} in an instruction pattern can specify
1005
constraints for the operands allowed.  The constraints allow you to
1006
fine-tune matching within the set of operands allowed by the
1007
predicate.
1008
 
1009
@end ifset
1010
@ifclear INTERNALS
1011
@node Constraints
1012
@section Constraints for @code{asm} Operands
1013
@cindex operand constraints, @code{asm}
1014
@cindex constraints, @code{asm}
1015
@cindex @code{asm} constraints
1016
 
1017
Here are specific details on what constraint letters you can use with
1018
@code{asm} operands.
1019
@end ifclear
1020
Constraints can say whether
1021
an operand may be in a register, and which kinds of register; whether the
1022
operand can be a memory reference, and which kinds of address; whether the
1023
operand may be an immediate constant, and which possible values it may
1024
have.  Constraints can also require two operands to match.
1025
 
1026
@ifset INTERNALS
1027
@menu
1028
* Simple Constraints::  Basic use of constraints.
1029
* Multi-Alternative::   When an insn has two alternative constraint-patterns.
1030
* Class Preferences::   Constraints guide which hard register to put things in.
1031
* Modifiers::           More precise control over effects of constraints.
1032
* Machine Constraints:: Existing constraints for some particular machines.
1033
@end menu
1034
@end ifset
1035
 
1036
@ifclear INTERNALS
1037
@menu
1038
* Simple Constraints::  Basic use of constraints.
1039
* Multi-Alternative::   When an insn has two alternative constraint-patterns.
1040
* Modifiers::           More precise control over effects of constraints.
1041
* Machine Constraints:: Special constraints for some particular machines.
1042
@end menu
1043
@end ifclear
1044
 
1045
@node Simple Constraints
1046
@subsection Simple Constraints
1047
@cindex simple constraints
1048
 
1049
The simplest kind of constraint is a string full of letters, each of
1050
which describes one kind of operand that is permitted.  Here are
1051
the letters that are allowed:
1052
 
1053
@table @asis
1054
@item whitespace
1055
Whitespace characters are ignored and can be inserted at any position
1056
except the first.  This enables each alternative for different operands to
1057
be visually aligned in the machine description even if they have different
1058
number of constraints and modifiers.
1059
 
1060
@cindex @samp{m} in constraint
1061
@cindex memory references in constraints
1062
@item @samp{m}
1063
A memory operand is allowed, with any kind of address that the machine
1064
supports in general.
1065
 
1066
@cindex offsettable address
1067
@cindex @samp{o} in constraint
1068
@item @samp{o}
1069
A memory operand is allowed, but only if the address is
1070
@dfn{offsettable}.  This means that adding a small integer (actually,
1071
the width in bytes of the operand, as determined by its machine mode)
1072
may be added to the address and the result is also a valid memory
1073
address.
1074
 
1075
@cindex autoincrement/decrement addressing
1076
For example, an address which is constant is offsettable; so is an
1077
address that is the sum of a register and a constant (as long as a
1078
slightly larger constant is also within the range of address-offsets
1079
supported by the machine); but an autoincrement or autodecrement
1080
address is not offsettable.  More complicated indirect/indexed
1081
addresses may or may not be offsettable depending on the other
1082
addressing modes that the machine supports.
1083
 
1084
Note that in an output operand which can be matched by another
1085
operand, the constraint letter @samp{o} is valid only when accompanied
1086
by both @samp{<} (if the target machine has predecrement addressing)
1087
and @samp{>} (if the target machine has preincrement addressing).
1088
 
1089
@cindex @samp{V} in constraint
1090
@item @samp{V}
1091
A memory operand that is not offsettable.  In other words, anything that
1092
would fit the @samp{m} constraint but not the @samp{o} constraint.
1093
 
1094
@cindex @samp{<} in constraint
1095
@item @samp{<}
1096
A memory operand with autodecrement addressing (either predecrement or
1097
postdecrement) is allowed.
1098
 
1099
@cindex @samp{>} in constraint
1100
@item @samp{>}
1101
A memory operand with autoincrement addressing (either preincrement or
1102
postincrement) is allowed.
1103
 
1104
@cindex @samp{r} in constraint
1105
@cindex registers in constraints
1106
@item @samp{r}
1107
A register operand is allowed provided that it is in a general
1108
register.
1109
 
1110
@cindex constants in constraints
1111
@cindex @samp{i} in constraint
1112
@item @samp{i}
1113
An immediate integer operand (one with constant value) is allowed.
1114
This includes symbolic constants whose values will be known only at
1115
assembly time or later.
1116
 
1117
@cindex @samp{n} in constraint
1118
@item @samp{n}
1119
An immediate integer operand with a known numeric value is allowed.
1120
Many systems cannot support assembly-time constants for operands less
1121
than a word wide.  Constraints for these operands should use @samp{n}
1122
rather than @samp{i}.
1123
 
1124
@cindex @samp{I} in constraint
1125
@item @samp{I}, @samp{J}, @samp{K}, @dots{} @samp{P}
1126
Other letters in the range @samp{I} through @samp{P} may be defined in
1127
a machine-dependent fashion to permit immediate integer operands with
1128
explicit integer values in specified ranges.  For example, on the
1129
68000, @samp{I} is defined to stand for the range of values 1 to 8.
1130
This is the range permitted as a shift count in the shift
1131
instructions.
1132
 
1133
@cindex @samp{E} in constraint
1134
@item @samp{E}
1135
An immediate floating operand (expression code @code{const_double}) is
1136
allowed, but only if the target floating point format is the same as
1137
that of the host machine (on which the compiler is running).
1138
 
1139
@cindex @samp{F} in constraint
1140
@item @samp{F}
1141
An immediate floating operand (expression code @code{const_double} or
1142
@code{const_vector}) is allowed.
1143
 
1144
@cindex @samp{G} in constraint
1145
@cindex @samp{H} in constraint
1146
@item @samp{G}, @samp{H}
1147
@samp{G} and @samp{H} may be defined in a machine-dependent fashion to
1148
permit immediate floating operands in particular ranges of values.
1149
 
1150
@cindex @samp{s} in constraint
1151
@item @samp{s}
1152
An immediate integer operand whose value is not an explicit integer is
1153
allowed.
1154
 
1155
This might appear strange; if an insn allows a constant operand with a
1156
value not known at compile time, it certainly must allow any known
1157
value.  So why use @samp{s} instead of @samp{i}?  Sometimes it allows
1158
better code to be generated.
1159
 
1160
For example, on the 68000 in a fullword instruction it is possible to
1161
use an immediate operand; but if the immediate value is between @minus{}128
1162
and 127, better code results from loading the value into a register and
1163
using the register.  This is because the load into the register can be
1164
done with a @samp{moveq} instruction.  We arrange for this to happen
1165
by defining the letter @samp{K} to mean ``any integer outside the
1166
range @minus{}128 to 127'', and then specifying @samp{Ks} in the operand
1167
constraints.
1168
 
1169
@cindex @samp{g} in constraint
1170
@item @samp{g}
1171
Any register, memory or immediate integer operand is allowed, except for
1172
registers that are not general registers.
1173
 
1174
@cindex @samp{X} in constraint
1175
@item @samp{X}
1176
@ifset INTERNALS
1177
Any operand whatsoever is allowed, even if it does not satisfy
1178
@code{general_operand}.  This is normally used in the constraint of
1179
a @code{match_scratch} when certain alternatives will not actually
1180
require a scratch register.
1181
@end ifset
1182
@ifclear INTERNALS
1183
Any operand whatsoever is allowed.
1184
@end ifclear
1185
 
1186
@cindex @samp{0} in constraint
1187
@cindex digits in constraint
1188
@item @samp{0}, @samp{1}, @samp{2}, @dots{} @samp{9}
1189
An operand that matches the specified operand number is allowed.  If a
1190
digit is used together with letters within the same alternative, the
1191
digit should come last.
1192
 
1193
This number is allowed to be more than a single digit.  If multiple
1194
digits are encountered consecutively, they are interpreted as a single
1195
decimal integer.  There is scant chance for ambiguity, since to-date
1196
it has never been desirable that @samp{10} be interpreted as matching
1197
either operand 1 @emph{or} operand 0.  Should this be desired, one
1198
can use multiple alternatives instead.
1199
 
1200
@cindex matching constraint
1201
@cindex constraint, matching
1202
This is called a @dfn{matching constraint} and what it really means is
1203
that the assembler has only a single operand that fills two roles
1204
@ifset INTERNALS
1205
considered separate in the RTL insn.  For example, an add insn has two
1206
input operands and one output operand in the RTL, but on most CISC
1207
@end ifset
1208
@ifclear INTERNALS
1209
which @code{asm} distinguishes.  For example, an add instruction uses
1210
two input operands and an output operand, but on most CISC
1211
@end ifclear
1212
machines an add instruction really has only two operands, one of them an
1213
input-output operand:
1214
 
1215
@smallexample
1216
addl #35,r12
1217
@end smallexample
1218
 
1219
Matching constraints are used in these circumstances.
1220
More precisely, the two operands that match must include one input-only
1221
operand and one output-only operand.  Moreover, the digit must be a
1222
smaller number than the number of the operand that uses it in the
1223
constraint.
1224
 
1225
@ifset INTERNALS
1226
For operands to match in a particular case usually means that they
1227
are identical-looking RTL expressions.  But in a few special cases
1228
specific kinds of dissimilarity are allowed.  For example, @code{*x}
1229
as an input operand will match @code{*x++} as an output operand.
1230
For proper results in such cases, the output template should always
1231
use the output-operand's number when printing the operand.
1232
@end ifset
1233
 
1234
@cindex load address instruction
1235
@cindex push address instruction
1236
@cindex address constraints
1237
@cindex @samp{p} in constraint
1238
@item @samp{p}
1239
An operand that is a valid memory address is allowed.  This is
1240
for ``load address'' and ``push address'' instructions.
1241
 
1242
@findex address_operand
1243
@samp{p} in the constraint must be accompanied by @code{address_operand}
1244
as the predicate in the @code{match_operand}.  This predicate interprets
1245
the mode specified in the @code{match_operand} as the mode of the memory
1246
reference for which the address would be valid.
1247
 
1248
@cindex other register constraints
1249
@cindex extensible constraints
1250
@item @var{other-letters}
1251
Other letters can be defined in machine-dependent fashion to stand for
1252
particular classes of registers or other arbitrary operand types.
1253
@samp{d}, @samp{a} and @samp{f} are defined on the 68000/68020 to stand
1254
for data, address and floating point registers.
1255
 
1256
@ifset INTERNALS
1257
The machine description macro @code{REG_CLASS_FROM_LETTER} has first
1258
cut at the otherwise unused letters.  If it evaluates to @code{NO_REGS},
1259
then @code{EXTRA_CONSTRAINT} is evaluated.
1260
 
1261
A typical use for @code{EXTRA_CONSTRAINT} would be to distinguish certain
1262
types of memory references that affect other insn operands.
1263
@end ifset
1264
@end table
1265
 
1266
@ifset INTERNALS
1267
In order to have valid assembler code, each operand must satisfy
1268
its constraint.  But a failure to do so does not prevent the pattern
1269
from applying to an insn.  Instead, it directs the compiler to modify
1270
the code so that the constraint will be satisfied.  Usually this is
1271
done by copying an operand into a register.
1272
 
1273
Contrast, therefore, the two instruction patterns that follow:
1274
 
1275
@smallexample
1276
(define_insn ""
1277
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=r")
1278
        (plus:SI (match_dup 0)
1279
                 (match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "r")))]
1280
  ""
1281
  "@dots{}")
1282
@end smallexample
1283
 
1284
@noindent
1285
which has two operands, one of which must appear in two places, and
1286
 
1287
@smallexample
1288
(define_insn ""
1289
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=r")
1290
        (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "0")
1291
                 (match_operand:SI 2 "general_operand" "r")))]
1292
  ""
1293
  "@dots{}")
1294
@end smallexample
1295
 
1296
@noindent
1297
which has three operands, two of which are required by a constraint to be
1298
identical.  If we are considering an insn of the form
1299
 
1300
@smallexample
1301
(insn @var{n} @var{prev} @var{next}
1302
  (set (reg:SI 3)
1303
       (plus:SI (reg:SI 6) (reg:SI 109)))
1304
  @dots{})
1305
@end smallexample
1306
 
1307
@noindent
1308
the first pattern would not apply at all, because this insn does not
1309
contain two identical subexpressions in the right place.  The pattern would
1310
say, ``That does not look like an add instruction; try other patterns''.
1311
The second pattern would say, ``Yes, that's an add instruction, but there
1312
is something wrong with it''.  It would direct the reload pass of the
1313
compiler to generate additional insns to make the constraint true.  The
1314
results might look like this:
1315
 
1316
@smallexample
1317
(insn @var{n2} @var{prev} @var{n}
1318
  (set (reg:SI 3) (reg:SI 6))
1319
  @dots{})
1320
 
1321
(insn @var{n} @var{n2} @var{next}
1322
  (set (reg:SI 3)
1323
       (plus:SI (reg:SI 3) (reg:SI 109)))
1324
  @dots{})
1325
@end smallexample
1326
 
1327
It is up to you to make sure that each operand, in each pattern, has
1328
constraints that can handle any RTL expression that could be present for
1329
that operand.  (When multiple alternatives are in use, each pattern must,
1330
for each possible combination of operand expressions, have at least one
1331
alternative which can handle that combination of operands.)  The
1332
constraints don't need to @emph{allow} any possible operand---when this is
1333
the case, they do not constrain---but they must at least point the way to
1334
reloading any possible operand so that it will fit.
1335
 
1336
@itemize @bullet
1337
@item
1338
If the constraint accepts whatever operands the predicate permits,
1339
there is no problem: reloading is never necessary for this operand.
1340
 
1341
For example, an operand whose constraints permit everything except
1342
registers is safe provided its predicate rejects registers.
1343
 
1344
An operand whose predicate accepts only constant values is safe
1345
provided its constraints include the letter @samp{i}.  If any possible
1346
constant value is accepted, then nothing less than @samp{i} will do;
1347
if the predicate is more selective, then the constraints may also be
1348
more selective.
1349
 
1350
@item
1351
Any operand expression can be reloaded by copying it into a register.
1352
So if an operand's constraints allow some kind of register, it is
1353
certain to be safe.  It need not permit all classes of registers; the
1354
compiler knows how to copy a register into another register of the
1355
proper class in order to make an instruction valid.
1356
 
1357
@cindex nonoffsettable memory reference
1358
@cindex memory reference, nonoffsettable
1359
@item
1360
A nonoffsettable memory reference can be reloaded by copying the
1361
address into a register.  So if the constraint uses the letter
1362
@samp{o}, all memory references are taken care of.
1363
 
1364
@item
1365
A constant operand can be reloaded by allocating space in memory to
1366
hold it as preinitialized data.  Then the memory reference can be used
1367
in place of the constant.  So if the constraint uses the letters
1368
@samp{o} or @samp{m}, constant operands are not a problem.
1369
 
1370
@item
1371
If the constraint permits a constant and a pseudo register used in an insn
1372
was not allocated to a hard register and is equivalent to a constant,
1373
the register will be replaced with the constant.  If the predicate does
1374
not permit a constant and the insn is re-recognized for some reason, the
1375
compiler will crash.  Thus the predicate must always recognize any
1376
objects allowed by the constraint.
1377
@end itemize
1378
 
1379
If the operand's predicate can recognize registers, but the constraint does
1380
not permit them, it can make the compiler crash.  When this operand happens
1381
to be a register, the reload pass will be stymied, because it does not know
1382
how to copy a register temporarily into memory.
1383
 
1384
If the predicate accepts a unary operator, the constraint applies to the
1385
operand.  For example, the MIPS processor at ISA level 3 supports an
1386
instruction which adds two registers in @code{SImode} to produce a
1387
@code{DImode} result, but only if the registers are correctly sign
1388
extended.  This predicate for the input operands accepts a
1389
@code{sign_extend} of an @code{SImode} register.  Write the constraint
1390
to indicate the type of register that is required for the operand of the
1391
@code{sign_extend}.
1392
@end ifset
1393
 
1394
@node Multi-Alternative
1395
@subsection Multiple Alternative Constraints
1396
@cindex multiple alternative constraints
1397
 
1398
Sometimes a single instruction has multiple alternative sets of possible
1399
operands.  For example, on the 68000, a logical-or instruction can combine
1400
register or an immediate value into memory, or it can combine any kind of
1401
operand into a register; but it cannot combine one memory location into
1402
another.
1403
 
1404
These constraints are represented as multiple alternatives.  An alternative
1405
can be described by a series of letters for each operand.  The overall
1406
constraint for an operand is made from the letters for this operand
1407
from the first alternative, a comma, the letters for this operand from
1408
the second alternative, a comma, and so on until the last alternative.
1409
@ifset INTERNALS
1410
Here is how it is done for fullword logical-or on the 68000:
1411
 
1412
@smallexample
1413
(define_insn "iorsi3"
1414
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=m,d")
1415
        (ior:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "%0,0")
1416
                (match_operand:SI 2 "general_operand" "dKs,dmKs")))]
1417
  @dots{})
1418
@end smallexample
1419
 
1420
The first alternative has @samp{m} (memory) for operand 0, @samp{0} for
1421
operand 1 (meaning it must match operand 0), and @samp{dKs} for operand
1422
2.  The second alternative has @samp{d} (data register) for operand 0,
1423
@samp{0} for operand 1, and @samp{dmKs} for operand 2.  The @samp{=} and
1424
@samp{%} in the constraints apply to all the alternatives; their
1425
meaning is explained in the next section (@pxref{Class Preferences}).
1426
@end ifset
1427
 
1428
@c FIXME Is this ? and ! stuff of use in asm()?  If not, hide unless INTERNAL
1429
If all the operands fit any one alternative, the instruction is valid.
1430
Otherwise, for each alternative, the compiler counts how many instructions
1431
must be added to copy the operands so that that alternative applies.
1432
The alternative requiring the least copying is chosen.  If two alternatives
1433
need the same amount of copying, the one that comes first is chosen.
1434
These choices can be altered with the @samp{?} and @samp{!} characters:
1435
 
1436
@table @code
1437
@cindex @samp{?} in constraint
1438
@cindex question mark
1439
@item ?
1440
Disparage slightly the alternative that the @samp{?} appears in,
1441
as a choice when no alternative applies exactly.  The compiler regards
1442
this alternative as one unit more costly for each @samp{?} that appears
1443
in it.
1444
 
1445
@cindex @samp{!} in constraint
1446
@cindex exclamation point
1447
@item !
1448
Disparage severely the alternative that the @samp{!} appears in.
1449
This alternative can still be used if it fits without reloading,
1450
but if reloading is needed, some other alternative will be used.
1451
@end table
1452
 
1453
@ifset INTERNALS
1454
When an insn pattern has multiple alternatives in its constraints, often
1455
the appearance of the assembler code is determined mostly by which
1456
alternative was matched.  When this is so, the C code for writing the
1457
assembler code can use the variable @code{which_alternative}, which is
1458
the ordinal number of the alternative that was actually satisfied (0 for
1459
the first, 1 for the second alternative, etc.).  @xref{Output Statement}.
1460
@end ifset
1461
 
1462
@ifset INTERNALS
1463
@node Class Preferences
1464
@subsection Register Class Preferences
1465
@cindex class preference constraints
1466
@cindex register class preference constraints
1467
 
1468
@cindex voting between constraint alternatives
1469
The operand constraints have another function: they enable the compiler
1470
to decide which kind of hardware register a pseudo register is best
1471
allocated to.  The compiler examines the constraints that apply to the
1472
insns that use the pseudo register, looking for the machine-dependent
1473
letters such as @samp{d} and @samp{a} that specify classes of registers.
1474
The pseudo register is put in whichever class gets the most ``votes''.
1475
The constraint letters @samp{g} and @samp{r} also vote: they vote in
1476
favor of a general register.  The machine description says which registers
1477
are considered general.
1478
 
1479
Of course, on some machines all registers are equivalent, and no register
1480
classes are defined.  Then none of this complexity is relevant.
1481
@end ifset
1482
 
1483
@node Modifiers
1484
@subsection Constraint Modifier Characters
1485
@cindex modifiers in constraints
1486
@cindex constraint modifier characters
1487
 
1488
@c prevent bad page break with this line
1489
Here are constraint modifier characters.
1490
 
1491
@table @samp
1492
@cindex @samp{=} in constraint
1493
@item =
1494
Means that this operand is write-only for this instruction: the previous
1495
value is discarded and replaced by output data.
1496
 
1497
@cindex @samp{+} in constraint
1498
@item +
1499
Means that this operand is both read and written by the instruction.
1500
 
1501
When the compiler fixes up the operands to satisfy the constraints,
1502
it needs to know which operands are inputs to the instruction and
1503
which are outputs from it.  @samp{=} identifies an output; @samp{+}
1504
identifies an operand that is both input and output; all other operands
1505
are assumed to be input only.
1506
 
1507
If you specify @samp{=} or @samp{+} in a constraint, you put it in the
1508
first character of the constraint string.
1509
 
1510
@cindex @samp{&} in constraint
1511
@cindex earlyclobber operand
1512
@item &
1513
Means (in a particular alternative) that this operand is an
1514
@dfn{earlyclobber} operand, which is modified before the instruction is
1515
finished using the input operands.  Therefore, this operand may not lie
1516
in a register that is used as an input operand or as part of any memory
1517
address.
1518
 
1519
@samp{&} applies only to the alternative in which it is written.  In
1520
constraints with multiple alternatives, sometimes one alternative
1521
requires @samp{&} while others do not.  See, for example, the
1522
@samp{movdf} insn of the 68000.
1523
 
1524
An input operand can be tied to an earlyclobber operand if its only
1525
use as an input occurs before the early result is written.  Adding
1526
alternatives of this form often allows GCC to produce better code
1527
when only some of the inputs can be affected by the earlyclobber.
1528
See, for example, the @samp{mulsi3} insn of the ARM@.
1529
 
1530
@samp{&} does not obviate the need to write @samp{=}.
1531
 
1532
@cindex @samp{%} in constraint
1533
@item %
1534
Declares the instruction to be commutative for this operand and the
1535
following operand.  This means that the compiler may interchange the
1536
two operands if that is the cheapest way to make all operands fit the
1537
constraints.
1538
@ifset INTERNALS
1539
This is often used in patterns for addition instructions
1540
that really have only two operands: the result must go in one of the
1541
arguments.  Here for example, is how the 68000 halfword-add
1542
instruction is defined:
1543
 
1544
@smallexample
1545
(define_insn "addhi3"
1546
  [(set (match_operand:HI 0 "general_operand" "=m,r")
1547
     (plus:HI (match_operand:HI 1 "general_operand" "%0,0")
1548
              (match_operand:HI 2 "general_operand" "di,g")))]
1549
  @dots{})
1550
@end smallexample
1551
@end ifset
1552
GCC can only handle one commutative pair in an asm; if you use more,
1553
the compiler may fail.  Note that you need not use the modifier if
1554
the two alternatives are strictly identical; this would only waste
1555
time in the reload pass.  The modifier is not operational after
1556
register allocation, so the result of @code{define_peephole2}
1557
and @code{define_split}s performed after reload cannot rely on
1558
@samp{%} to make the intended insn match.
1559
 
1560
@cindex @samp{#} in constraint
1561
@item #
1562
Says that all following characters, up to the next comma, are to be
1563
ignored as a constraint.  They are significant only for choosing
1564
register preferences.
1565
 
1566
@cindex @samp{*} in constraint
1567
@item *
1568
Says that the following character should be ignored when choosing
1569
register preferences.  @samp{*} has no effect on the meaning of the
1570
constraint as a constraint, and no effect on reloading.
1571
 
1572
@ifset INTERNALS
1573
Here is an example: the 68000 has an instruction to sign-extend a
1574
halfword in a data register, and can also sign-extend a value by
1575
copying it into an address register.  While either kind of register is
1576
acceptable, the constraints on an address-register destination are
1577
less strict, so it is best if register allocation makes an address
1578
register its goal.  Therefore, @samp{*} is used so that the @samp{d}
1579
constraint letter (for data register) is ignored when computing
1580
register preferences.
1581
 
1582
@smallexample
1583
(define_insn "extendhisi2"
1584
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=*d,a")
1585
        (sign_extend:SI
1586
         (match_operand:HI 1 "general_operand" "0,g")))]
1587
  @dots{})
1588
@end smallexample
1589
@end ifset
1590
@end table
1591
 
1592
@node Machine Constraints
1593
@subsection Constraints for Particular Machines
1594
@cindex machine specific constraints
1595
@cindex constraints, machine specific
1596
 
1597
Whenever possible, you should use the general-purpose constraint letters
1598
in @code{asm} arguments, since they will convey meaning more readily to
1599
people reading your code.  Failing that, use the constraint letters
1600
that usually have very similar meanings across architectures.  The most
1601
commonly used constraints are @samp{m} and @samp{r} (for memory and
1602
general-purpose registers respectively; @pxref{Simple Constraints}), and
1603
@samp{I}, usually the letter indicating the most common
1604
immediate-constant format.
1605
 
1606
For each machine architecture, the
1607
@file{config/@var{machine}/@var{machine}.h} file defines additional
1608
constraints.  These constraints are used by the compiler itself for
1609
instruction generation, as well as for @code{asm} statements; therefore,
1610
some of the constraints are not particularly interesting for @code{asm}.
1611
The constraints are defined through these macros:
1612
 
1613
@table @code
1614
@item REG_CLASS_FROM_LETTER
1615
Register class constraints (usually lowercase).
1616
 
1617
@item CONST_OK_FOR_LETTER_P
1618
Immediate constant constraints, for non-floating point constants of
1619
word size or smaller precision (usually uppercase).
1620
 
1621
@item CONST_DOUBLE_OK_FOR_LETTER_P
1622
Immediate constant constraints, for all floating point constants and for
1623
constants of greater than word size precision (usually uppercase).
1624
 
1625
@item EXTRA_CONSTRAINT
1626
Special cases of registers or memory.  This macro is not required, and
1627
is only defined for some machines.
1628
@end table
1629
 
1630
Inspecting these macro definitions in the compiler source for your
1631
machine is the best way to be certain you have the right constraints.
1632
However, here is a summary of the machine-dependent constraints
1633
available on some particular machines.
1634
 
1635
@table @emph
1636
@item ARM family---@file{arm.h}
1637
@table @code
1638
@item f
1639
Floating-point register
1640
 
1641
@item w
1642
VFP floating-point register
1643
 
1644
@item F
1645
One of the floating-point constants 0.0, 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0
1646
or 10.0
1647
 
1648
@item G
1649
Floating-point constant that would satisfy the constraint @samp{F} if it
1650
were negated
1651
 
1652
@item I
1653
Integer that is valid as an immediate operand in a data processing
1654
instruction.  That is, an integer in the range 0 to 255 rotated by a
1655
multiple of 2
1656
 
1657
@item J
1658
Integer in the range @minus{}4095 to 4095
1659
 
1660
@item K
1661
Integer that satisfies constraint @samp{I} when inverted (ones complement)
1662
 
1663
@item L
1664
Integer that satisfies constraint @samp{I} when negated (twos complement)
1665
 
1666
@item M
1667
Integer in the range 0 to 32
1668
 
1669
@item Q
1670
A memory reference where the exact address is in a single register
1671
(`@samp{m}' is preferable for @code{asm} statements)
1672
 
1673
@item R
1674
An item in the constant pool
1675
 
1676
@item S
1677
A symbol in the text segment of the current file
1678
 
1679
@item Uv
1680
A memory reference suitable for VFP load/store insns (reg+constant offset)
1681
 
1682
@item Uy
1683
A memory reference suitable for iWMMXt load/store instructions.
1684
 
1685
@item Uq
1686
A memory reference suitable for the ARMv4 ldrsb instruction.
1687
@end table
1688
 
1689
@item AVR family---@file{avr.h}
1690
@table @code
1691
@item l
1692
Registers from r0 to r15
1693
 
1694
@item a
1695
Registers from r16 to r23
1696
 
1697
@item d
1698
Registers from r16 to r31
1699
 
1700
@item w
1701
Registers from r24 to r31.  These registers can be used in @samp{adiw} command
1702
 
1703
@item e
1704
Pointer register (r26--r31)
1705
 
1706
@item b
1707
Base pointer register (r28--r31)
1708
 
1709
@item q
1710
Stack pointer register (SPH:SPL)
1711
 
1712
@item t
1713
Temporary register r0
1714
 
1715
@item x
1716
Register pair X (r27:r26)
1717
 
1718
@item y
1719
Register pair Y (r29:r28)
1720
 
1721
@item z
1722
Register pair Z (r31:r30)
1723
 
1724
@item I
1725
Constant greater than @minus{}1, less than 64
1726
 
1727
@item J
1728
Constant greater than @minus{}64, less than 1
1729
 
1730
@item K
1731
Constant integer 2
1732
 
1733
@item L
1734
Constant integer 0
1735
 
1736
@item M
1737
Constant that fits in 8 bits
1738
 
1739
@item N
1740
Constant integer @minus{}1
1741
 
1742
@item O
1743
Constant integer 8, 16, or 24
1744
 
1745
@item P
1746
Constant integer 1
1747
 
1748
@item G
1749
A floating point constant 0.0
1750
@end table
1751
 
1752
@item CRX Architecture---@file{crx.h}
1753
@table @code
1754
 
1755
@item b
1756
Registers from r0 to r14 (registers without stack pointer)
1757
 
1758
@item l
1759
Register r16 (64-bit accumulator lo register)
1760
 
1761
@item h
1762
Register r17 (64-bit accumulator hi register)
1763
 
1764
@item k
1765
Register pair r16-r17. (64-bit accumulator lo-hi pair)
1766
 
1767
@item I
1768
Constant that fits in 3 bits
1769
 
1770
@item J
1771
Constant that fits in 4 bits
1772
 
1773
@item K
1774
Constant that fits in 5 bits
1775
 
1776
@item L
1777
Constant that is one of -1, 4, -4, 7, 8, 12, 16, 20, 32, 48
1778
 
1779
@item G
1780
Floating point constant that is legal for store immediate
1781
@end table
1782
 
1783
@item PowerPC and IBM RS6000---@file{rs6000.h}
1784
@table @code
1785
@item b
1786
Address base register
1787
 
1788
@item f
1789
Floating point register
1790
 
1791
@item v
1792
Vector register
1793
 
1794
@item h
1795
@samp{MQ}, @samp{CTR}, or @samp{LINK} register
1796
 
1797
@item q
1798
@samp{MQ} register
1799
 
1800
@item c
1801
@samp{CTR} register
1802
 
1803
@item l
1804
@samp{LINK} register
1805
 
1806
@item x
1807
@samp{CR} register (condition register) number 0
1808
 
1809
@item y
1810
@samp{CR} register (condition register)
1811
 
1812
@item z
1813
@samp{FPMEM} stack memory for FPR-GPR transfers
1814
 
1815
@item I
1816
Signed 16-bit constant
1817
 
1818
@item J
1819
Unsigned 16-bit constant shifted left 16 bits (use @samp{L} instead for
1820
@code{SImode} constants)
1821
 
1822
@item K
1823
Unsigned 16-bit constant
1824
 
1825
@item L
1826
Signed 16-bit constant shifted left 16 bits
1827
 
1828
@item M
1829
Constant larger than 31
1830
 
1831
@item N
1832
Exact power of 2
1833
 
1834
@item O
1835
Zero
1836
 
1837
@item P
1838
Constant whose negation is a signed 16-bit constant
1839
 
1840
@item G
1841
Floating point constant that can be loaded into a register with one
1842
instruction per word
1843
 
1844
@item Q
1845
Memory operand that is an offset from a register (@samp{m} is preferable
1846
for @code{asm} statements)
1847
 
1848
@item R
1849
AIX TOC entry
1850
 
1851
@item S
1852
Constant suitable as a 64-bit mask operand
1853
 
1854
@item T
1855
Constant suitable as a 32-bit mask operand
1856
 
1857
@item U
1858
System V Release 4 small data area reference
1859
@end table
1860
 
1861
@item MorphoTech family---@file{mt.h}
1862
@table @code
1863
@item I
1864
Constant for an arithmetic insn (16-bit signed integer).
1865
 
1866
@item J
1867
The constant 0.
1868
 
1869
@item K
1870
Constant for a logical insn (16-bit zero-extended integer).
1871
 
1872
@item L
1873
A constant that can be loaded with @code{lui} (i.e.@: the bottom 16
1874
bits are zero).
1875
 
1876
@item M
1877
A constant that takes two words to load (i.e.@: not matched by
1878
@code{I}, @code{K}, or @code{L}).
1879
 
1880
@item N
1881
Negative 16-bit constants other than -65536.
1882
 
1883
@item O
1884
A 15-bit signed integer constant.
1885
 
1886
@item P
1887
A positive 16-bit constant.
1888
@end table
1889
 
1890
@item Intel 386---@file{i386.h}
1891
@table @code
1892
@item q
1893
@samp{a}, @code{b}, @code{c}, or @code{d} register for the i386.
1894
For x86-64 it is equivalent to @samp{r} class (for 8-bit instructions that
1895
do not use upper halves).
1896
 
1897
@item Q
1898
@samp{a}, @code{b}, @code{c}, or @code{d} register (for 8-bit instructions,
1899
that do use upper halves).
1900
 
1901
@item R
1902
Legacy register---equivalent to @code{r} class in i386 mode.
1903
(for non-8-bit registers used together with 8-bit upper halves in a single
1904
instruction)
1905
 
1906
@item A
1907
Specifies the @samp{a} or @samp{d} registers.  This is primarily useful
1908
for 64-bit integer values (when in 32-bit mode) intended to be returned
1909
with the @samp{d} register holding the most significant bits and the
1910
@samp{a} register holding the least significant bits.
1911
 
1912
@item f
1913
Floating point register
1914
 
1915
@item t
1916
First (top of stack) floating point register
1917
 
1918
@item u
1919
Second floating point register
1920
 
1921
@item a
1922
@samp{a} register
1923
 
1924
@item b
1925
@samp{b} register
1926
 
1927
@item c
1928
@samp{c} register
1929
 
1930
@item C
1931
Specifies constant that can be easily constructed in SSE register without
1932
loading it from memory.
1933
 
1934
@item d
1935
@samp{d} register
1936
 
1937
@item D
1938
@samp{di} register
1939
 
1940
@item S
1941
@samp{si} register
1942
 
1943
@item x
1944
@samp{xmm} SSE register
1945
 
1946
@item y
1947
MMX register
1948
 
1949
@item I
1950
Constant in range 0 to 31 (for 32-bit shifts)
1951
 
1952
@item J
1953
Constant in range 0 to 63 (for 64-bit shifts)
1954
 
1955
@item K
1956
@samp{0xff}
1957
 
1958
@item L
1959
@samp{0xffff}
1960
 
1961
@item M
1962
0, 1, 2, or 3 (shifts for @code{lea} instruction)
1963
 
1964
@item N
1965
Constant in range 0 to 255 (for @code{out} instruction)
1966
 
1967
@item Z
1968
Constant in range 0 to @code{0xffffffff} or symbolic reference known to fit specified range.
1969
(for using immediates in zero extending 32-bit to 64-bit x86-64 instructions)
1970
 
1971
@item e
1972
Constant in range @minus{}2147483648 to 2147483647 or symbolic reference known to fit specified range.
1973
(for using immediates in 64-bit x86-64 instructions)
1974
 
1975
@item G
1976
Standard 80387 floating point constant
1977
@end table
1978
 
1979
@item Intel IA-64---@file{ia64.h}
1980
@table @code
1981
@item a
1982
General register @code{r0} to @code{r3} for @code{addl} instruction
1983
 
1984
@item b
1985
Branch register
1986
 
1987
@item c
1988
Predicate register (@samp{c} as in ``conditional'')
1989
 
1990
@item d
1991
Application register residing in M-unit
1992
 
1993
@item e
1994
Application register residing in I-unit
1995
 
1996
@item f
1997
Floating-point register
1998
 
1999
@item m
2000
Memory operand.
2001
Remember that @samp{m} allows postincrement and postdecrement which
2002
require printing with @samp{%Pn} on IA-64.
2003
Use @samp{S} to disallow postincrement and postdecrement.
2004
 
2005
@item G
2006
Floating-point constant 0.0 or 1.0
2007
 
2008
@item I
2009
14-bit signed integer constant
2010
 
2011
@item J
2012
22-bit signed integer constant
2013
 
2014
@item K
2015
8-bit signed integer constant for logical instructions
2016
 
2017
@item L
2018
8-bit adjusted signed integer constant for compare pseudo-ops
2019
 
2020
@item M
2021
6-bit unsigned integer constant for shift counts
2022
 
2023
@item N
2024
9-bit signed integer constant for load and store postincrements
2025
 
2026
@item O
2027
The constant zero
2028
 
2029
@item P
2030
 
2031
 
2032
@item Q
2033
Non-volatile memory for floating-point loads and stores
2034
 
2035
@item R
2036
Integer constant in the range 1 to 4 for @code{shladd} instruction
2037
 
2038
@item S
2039
Memory operand except postincrement and postdecrement
2040
@end table
2041
 
2042
@item FRV---@file{frv.h}
2043
@table @code
2044
@item a
2045
Register in the class @code{ACC_REGS} (@code{acc0} to @code{acc7}).
2046
 
2047
@item b
2048
Register in the class @code{EVEN_ACC_REGS} (@code{acc0} to @code{acc7}).
2049
 
2050
@item c
2051
Register in the class @code{CC_REGS} (@code{fcc0} to @code{fcc3} and
2052
@code{icc0} to @code{icc3}).
2053
 
2054
@item d
2055
Register in the class @code{GPR_REGS} (@code{gr0} to @code{gr63}).
2056
 
2057
@item e
2058
Register in the class @code{EVEN_REGS} (@code{gr0} to @code{gr63}).
2059
Odd registers are excluded not in the class but through the use of a machine
2060
mode larger than 4 bytes.
2061
 
2062
@item f
2063
Register in the class @code{FPR_REGS} (@code{fr0} to @code{fr63}).
2064
 
2065
@item h
2066
Register in the class @code{FEVEN_REGS} (@code{fr0} to @code{fr63}).
2067
Odd registers are excluded not in the class but through the use of a machine
2068
mode larger than 4 bytes.
2069
 
2070
@item l
2071
Register in the class @code{LR_REG} (the @code{lr} register).
2072
 
2073
@item q
2074
Register in the class @code{QUAD_REGS} (@code{gr2} to @code{gr63}).
2075
Register numbers not divisible by 4 are excluded not in the class but through
2076
the use of a machine mode larger than 8 bytes.
2077
 
2078
@item t
2079
Register in the class @code{ICC_REGS} (@code{icc0} to @code{icc3}).
2080
 
2081
@item u
2082
Register in the class @code{FCC_REGS} (@code{fcc0} to @code{fcc3}).
2083
 
2084
@item v
2085
Register in the class @code{ICR_REGS} (@code{cc4} to @code{cc7}).
2086
 
2087
@item w
2088
Register in the class @code{FCR_REGS} (@code{cc0} to @code{cc3}).
2089
 
2090
@item x
2091
Register in the class @code{QUAD_FPR_REGS} (@code{fr0} to @code{fr63}).
2092
Register numbers not divisible by 4 are excluded not in the class but through
2093
the use of a machine mode larger than 8 bytes.
2094
 
2095
@item z
2096
Register in the class @code{SPR_REGS} (@code{lcr} and @code{lr}).
2097
 
2098
@item A
2099
Register in the class @code{QUAD_ACC_REGS} (@code{acc0} to @code{acc7}).
2100
 
2101
@item B
2102
Register in the class @code{ACCG_REGS} (@code{accg0} to @code{accg7}).
2103
 
2104
@item C
2105
Register in the class @code{CR_REGS} (@code{cc0} to @code{cc7}).
2106
 
2107
@item G
2108
Floating point constant zero
2109
 
2110
@item I
2111
6-bit signed integer constant
2112
 
2113
@item J
2114
10-bit signed integer constant
2115
 
2116
@item L
2117
16-bit signed integer constant
2118
 
2119
@item M
2120
16-bit unsigned integer constant
2121
 
2122
@item N
2123
12-bit signed integer constant that is negative---i.e.@: in the
2124
range of @minus{}2048 to @minus{}1
2125
 
2126
@item O
2127
Constant zero
2128
 
2129
@item P
2130
12-bit signed integer constant that is greater than zero---i.e.@: in the
2131
range of 1 to 2047.
2132
 
2133
@end table
2134
 
2135
@item Blackfin family---@file{bfin.h}
2136
@table @code
2137
@item a
2138
P register
2139
 
2140
@item d
2141
D register
2142
 
2143
@item z
2144
A call clobbered P register.
2145
 
2146
@item D
2147
Even-numbered D register
2148
 
2149
@item W
2150
Odd-numbered D register
2151
 
2152
@item e
2153
Accumulator register.
2154
 
2155
@item A
2156
Even-numbered accumulator register.
2157
 
2158
@item B
2159
Odd-numbered accumulator register.
2160
 
2161
@item b
2162
I register
2163
 
2164
@item B
2165
B register
2166
 
2167
@item f
2168
M register
2169
 
2170
@item c
2171
Registers used for circular buffering, i.e. I, B, or L registers.
2172
 
2173
@item C
2174
The CC register.
2175
 
2176
@item x
2177
Any D, P, B, M, I or L register.
2178
 
2179
@item y
2180
Additional registers typically used only in prologues and epilogues: RETS,
2181
RETN, RETI, RETX, RETE, ASTAT, SEQSTAT and USP.
2182
 
2183
@item w
2184
Any register except accumulators or CC.
2185
 
2186
@item Ksh
2187
Signed 16 bit integer (in the range -32768 to 32767)
2188
 
2189
@item Kuh
2190
Unsigned 16 bit integer (in the range 0 to 65535)
2191
 
2192
@item Ks7
2193
Signed 7 bit integer (in the range -64 to 63)
2194
 
2195
@item Ku7
2196
Unsigned 7 bit integer (in the range 0 to 127)
2197
 
2198
@item Ku5
2199
Unsigned 5 bit integer (in the range 0 to 31)
2200
 
2201
@item Ks4
2202
Signed 4 bit integer (in the range -8 to 7)
2203
 
2204
@item Ks3
2205
Signed 3 bit integer (in the range -3 to 4)
2206
 
2207
@item Ku3
2208
Unsigned 3 bit integer (in the range 0 to 7)
2209
 
2210
@item P@var{n}
2211
Constant @var{n}, where @var{n} is a single-digit constant in the range 0 to 4.
2212
 
2213
@item M1
2214
Constant 255.
2215
 
2216
@item M2
2217
Constant 65535.
2218
 
2219
@item J
2220
An integer constant with exactly a single bit set.
2221
 
2222
@item L
2223
An integer constant with all bits set except exactly one.
2224
 
2225
@item H
2226
 
2227
@item Q
2228
Any SYMBOL_REF.
2229
@end table
2230
 
2231
@item M32C---@file{m32c.c}
2232
 
2233
@item Rsp
2234
@itemx Rfb
2235
@itemx Rsb
2236
@samp{$sp}, @samp{$fb}, @samp{$sb}.
2237
 
2238
@item Rcr
2239
Any control register, when they're 16 bits wide (nothing if control
2240
registers are 24 bits wide)
2241
 
2242
@item Rcl
2243
Any control register, when they're 24 bits wide.
2244
 
2245
@item R0w
2246
@itemx R1w
2247
@itemx R2w
2248
@itemx R3w
2249
$r0, $r1, $r2, $r3.
2250
 
2251
@item R02
2252
$r0 or $r2, or $r2r0 for 32 bit values.
2253
 
2254
@item R13
2255
$r1 or $r3, or $r3r1 for 32 bit values.
2256
 
2257
@item Rdi
2258
A register that can hold a 64 bit value.
2259
 
2260
@item Rhl
2261
$r0 or $r1 (registers with addressable high/low bytes)
2262
 
2263
@item R23
2264
$r2 or $r3
2265
 
2266
@item Raa
2267
Address registers
2268
 
2269
@item Raw
2270
Address registers when they're 16 bits wide.
2271
 
2272
@item Ral
2273
Address registers when they're 24 bits wide.
2274
 
2275
@item Rqi
2276
Registers that can hold QI values.
2277
 
2278
@item Rad
2279
Registers that can be used with displacements ($a0, $a1, $sb).
2280
 
2281
@item Rsi
2282
Registers that can hold 32 bit values.
2283
 
2284
@item Rhi
2285
Registers that can hold 16 bit values.
2286
 
2287
@item Rhc
2288
Registers chat can hold 16 bit values, including all control
2289
registers.
2290
 
2291
@item Rra
2292
$r0 through R1, plus $a0 and $a1.
2293
 
2294
@item Rfl
2295
The flags register.
2296
 
2297
@item Rmm
2298
The memory-based pseudo-registers $mem0 through $mem15.
2299
 
2300
@item Rpi
2301
Registers that can hold pointers (16 bit registers for r8c, m16c; 24
2302
bit registers for m32cm, m32c).
2303
 
2304
@item Rpa
2305
Matches multiple registers in a PARALLEL to form a larger register.
2306
Used to match function return values.
2307
 
2308
@item Is3
2309
-8 @dots{} 7
2310
 
2311
@item IS1
2312
-128 @dots{} 127
2313
 
2314
@item IS2
2315
-32768 @dots{} 32767
2316
 
2317
@item IU2
2318
 
2319
 
2320
@item In4
2321
-8 @dots{} -1 or 1 @dots{} 8
2322
 
2323
@item In5
2324
-16 @dots{} -1 or 1 @dots{} 16
2325
 
2326
@item In4
2327
-8 @dots{} -1 or 1 @dots{} 8
2328
 
2329
@item IM2
2330
-65536 @dots{} -1
2331
 
2332
@item Ilb
2333
An 8 bit value with exactly one bit set.
2334
 
2335
@item Ilw
2336
A 16 bit value with exactly one bit set.
2337
 
2338
@item Sd
2339
The common src/dest memory addressing modes.
2340
 
2341
@item Sa
2342
Memory addressed using $a0 or $a1.
2343
 
2344
@item Si
2345
Memory addressed with immediate addresses.
2346
 
2347
@item Ss
2348
Memory addressed using the stack pointer ($sp).
2349
 
2350
@item Sf
2351
Memory addressed using the frame base register ($fb).
2352
 
2353
@item Ss
2354
Memory addressed using the small base register ($sb).
2355
 
2356
@item S1
2357
$r1h
2358
 
2359
 
2360
@item MIPS---@file{mips.h}
2361
@table @code
2362
@item d
2363
General-purpose integer register
2364
 
2365
@item f
2366
Floating-point register (if available)
2367
 
2368
@item h
2369
@samp{Hi} register
2370
 
2371
@item l
2372
@samp{Lo} register
2373
 
2374
@item x
2375
@samp{Hi} or @samp{Lo} register
2376
 
2377
@item y
2378
General-purpose integer register
2379
 
2380
@item z
2381
Floating-point status register
2382
 
2383
@item I
2384
Signed 16-bit constant (for arithmetic instructions)
2385
 
2386
@item J
2387
Zero
2388
 
2389
@item K
2390
Zero-extended 16-bit constant (for logic instructions)
2391
 
2392
@item L
2393
Constant with low 16 bits zero (can be loaded with @code{lui})
2394
 
2395
@item M
2396
32-bit constant which requires two instructions to load (a constant
2397
which is not @samp{I}, @samp{K}, or @samp{L})
2398
 
2399
@item N
2400
Negative 16-bit constant
2401
 
2402
@item O
2403
Exact power of two
2404
 
2405
@item P
2406
Positive 16-bit constant
2407
 
2408
@item G
2409
Floating point zero
2410
 
2411
@item Q
2412
Memory reference that can be loaded with more than one instruction
2413
(@samp{m} is preferable for @code{asm} statements)
2414
 
2415
@item R
2416
Memory reference that can be loaded with one instruction
2417
(@samp{m} is preferable for @code{asm} statements)
2418
 
2419
@item S
2420
Memory reference in external OSF/rose PIC format
2421
(@samp{m} is preferable for @code{asm} statements)
2422
@end table
2423
 
2424
@item Motorola 680x0---@file{m68k.h}
2425
@table @code
2426
@item a
2427
Address register
2428
 
2429
@item d
2430
Data register
2431
 
2432
@item f
2433
68881 floating-point register, if available
2434
 
2435
@item I
2436
Integer in the range 1 to 8
2437
 
2438
@item J
2439
16-bit signed number
2440
 
2441
@item K
2442
Signed number whose magnitude is greater than 0x80
2443
 
2444
@item L
2445
Integer in the range @minus{}8 to @minus{}1
2446
 
2447
@item M
2448
Signed number whose magnitude is greater than 0x100
2449
 
2450
@item G
2451
Floating point constant that is not a 68881 constant
2452
@end table
2453
 
2454
@item Motorola 68HC11 & 68HC12 families---@file{m68hc11.h}
2455
@table @code
2456
@item a
2457
Register `a'
2458
 
2459
@item b
2460
Register `b'
2461
 
2462
@item d
2463
Register `d'
2464
 
2465
@item q
2466
An 8-bit register
2467
 
2468
@item t
2469
Temporary soft register _.tmp
2470
 
2471
@item u
2472
A soft register _.d1 to _.d31
2473
 
2474
@item w
2475
Stack pointer register
2476
 
2477
@item x
2478
Register `x'
2479
 
2480
@item y
2481
Register `y'
2482
 
2483
@item z
2484
Pseudo register `z' (replaced by `x' or `y' at the end)
2485
 
2486
@item A
2487
An address register: x, y or z
2488
 
2489
@item B
2490
An address register: x or y
2491
 
2492
@item D
2493
Register pair (x:d) to form a 32-bit value
2494
 
2495
@item L
2496
Constants in the range @minus{}65536 to 65535
2497
 
2498
@item M
2499
Constants whose 16-bit low part is zero
2500
 
2501
@item N
2502
Constant integer 1 or @minus{}1
2503
 
2504
@item O
2505
Constant integer 16
2506
 
2507
@item P
2508
Constants in the range @minus{}8 to 2
2509
 
2510
@end table
2511
 
2512
@need 1000
2513
@item SPARC---@file{sparc.h}
2514
@table @code
2515
@item f
2516
Floating-point register on the SPARC-V8 architecture and
2517
lower floating-point register on the SPARC-V9 architecture.
2518
 
2519
@item e
2520
Floating-point register.  It is equivalent to @samp{f} on the
2521
SPARC-V8 architecture and contains both lower and upper
2522
floating-point registers on the SPARC-V9 architecture.
2523
 
2524
@item c
2525
Floating-point condition code register.
2526
 
2527
@item d
2528
Lower floating-point register.  It is only valid on the SPARC-V9
2529
architecture when the Visual Instruction Set is available.
2530
 
2531
@item b
2532
Floating-point register.  It is only valid on the SPARC-V9 architecture
2533
when the Visual Instruction Set is available.
2534
 
2535
@item h
2536
64-bit global or out register for the SPARC-V8+ architecture.
2537
 
2538
@item I
2539
Signed 13-bit constant
2540
 
2541
@item J
2542
Zero
2543
 
2544
@item K
2545
32-bit constant with the low 12 bits clear (a constant that can be
2546
loaded with the @code{sethi} instruction)
2547
 
2548
@item L
2549
A constant in the range supported by @code{movcc} instructions
2550
 
2551
@item M
2552
A constant in the range supported by @code{movrcc} instructions
2553
 
2554
@item N
2555
Same as @samp{K}, except that it verifies that bits that are not in the
2556
lower 32-bit range are all zero.  Must be used instead of @samp{K} for
2557
modes wider than @code{SImode}
2558
 
2559
@item O
2560
The constant 4096
2561
 
2562
@item G
2563
Floating-point zero
2564
 
2565
@item H
2566
Signed 13-bit constant, sign-extended to 32 or 64 bits
2567
 
2568
@item Q
2569
Floating-point constant whose integral representation can
2570
be moved into an integer register using a single sethi
2571
instruction
2572
 
2573
@item R
2574
Floating-point constant whose integral representation can
2575
be moved into an integer register using a single mov
2576
instruction
2577
 
2578
@item S
2579
Floating-point constant whose integral representation can
2580
be moved into an integer register using a high/lo_sum
2581
instruction sequence
2582
 
2583
@item T
2584
Memory address aligned to an 8-byte boundary
2585
 
2586
@item U
2587
Even register
2588
 
2589
@item W
2590
Memory address for @samp{e} constraint registers
2591
 
2592
@item Y
2593
Vector zero
2594
 
2595
@end table
2596
 
2597
@item TMS320C3x/C4x---@file{c4x.h}
2598
@table @code
2599
@item a
2600
Auxiliary (address) register (ar0-ar7)
2601
 
2602
@item b
2603
Stack pointer register (sp)
2604
 
2605
@item c
2606
Standard (32-bit) precision integer register
2607
 
2608
@item f
2609
Extended (40-bit) precision register (r0-r11)
2610
 
2611
@item k
2612
Block count register (bk)
2613
 
2614
@item q
2615
Extended (40-bit) precision low register (r0-r7)
2616
 
2617
@item t
2618
Extended (40-bit) precision register (r0-r1)
2619
 
2620
@item u
2621
Extended (40-bit) precision register (r2-r3)
2622
 
2623
@item v
2624
Repeat count register (rc)
2625
 
2626
@item x
2627
Index register (ir0-ir1)
2628
 
2629
@item y
2630
Status (condition code) register (st)
2631
 
2632
@item z
2633
Data page register (dp)
2634
 
2635
@item G
2636
Floating-point zero
2637
 
2638
@item H
2639
Immediate 16-bit floating-point constant
2640
 
2641
@item I
2642
Signed 16-bit constant
2643
 
2644
@item J
2645
Signed 8-bit constant
2646
 
2647
@item K
2648
Signed 5-bit constant
2649
 
2650
@item L
2651
Unsigned 16-bit constant
2652
 
2653
@item M
2654
Unsigned 8-bit constant
2655
 
2656
@item N
2657
Ones complement of unsigned 16-bit constant
2658
 
2659
@item O
2660
High 16-bit constant (32-bit constant with 16 LSBs zero)
2661
 
2662
@item Q
2663
Indirect memory reference with signed 8-bit or index register displacement
2664
 
2665
@item R
2666
Indirect memory reference with unsigned 5-bit displacement
2667
 
2668
@item S
2669
Indirect memory reference with 1 bit or index register displacement
2670
 
2671
@item T
2672
Direct memory reference
2673
 
2674
@item U
2675
Symbolic address
2676
 
2677
@end table
2678
 
2679
@item S/390 and zSeries---@file{s390.h}
2680
@table @code
2681
@item a
2682
Address register (general purpose register except r0)
2683
 
2684
@item c
2685
Condition code register
2686
 
2687
@item d
2688
Data register (arbitrary general purpose register)
2689
 
2690
@item f
2691
Floating-point register
2692
 
2693
@item I
2694
Unsigned 8-bit constant (0--255)
2695
 
2696
@item J
2697
Unsigned 12-bit constant (0--4095)
2698
 
2699
@item K
2700
Signed 16-bit constant (@minus{}32768--32767)
2701
 
2702
@item L
2703
Value appropriate as displacement.
2704
@table @code
2705
       @item (0..4095)
2706
       for short displacement
2707
       @item (-524288..524287)
2708
       for long displacement
2709
@end table
2710
 
2711
@item M
2712
Constant integer with a value of 0x7fffffff.
2713
 
2714
@item N
2715
Multiple letter constraint followed by 4 parameter letters.
2716
@table @code
2717
         @item 0..9:
2718
         number of the part counting from most to least significant
2719
         @item H,Q:
2720
         mode of the part
2721
         @item D,S,H:
2722
         mode of the containing operand
2723
         @item 0,F:
2724
         value of the other parts (F---all bits set)
2725
@end table
2726
The constraint matches if the specified part of a constant
2727
has a value different from it's other parts.
2728
 
2729
@item Q
2730
Memory reference without index register and with short displacement.
2731
 
2732
@item R
2733
Memory reference with index register and short displacement.
2734
 
2735
@item S
2736
Memory reference without index register but with long displacement.
2737
 
2738
@item T
2739
Memory reference with index register and long displacement.
2740
 
2741
@item U
2742
Pointer with short displacement.
2743
 
2744
@item W
2745
Pointer with long displacement.
2746
 
2747
@item Y
2748
Shift count operand.
2749
 
2750
@end table
2751
 
2752
@item Xstormy16---@file{stormy16.h}
2753
@table @code
2754
@item a
2755
Register r0.
2756
 
2757
@item b
2758
Register r1.
2759
 
2760
@item c
2761
Register r2.
2762
 
2763
@item d
2764
Register r8.
2765
 
2766
@item e
2767
Registers r0 through r7.
2768
 
2769
@item t
2770
Registers r0 and r1.
2771
 
2772
@item y
2773
The carry register.
2774
 
2775
@item z
2776
Registers r8 and r9.
2777
 
2778
@item I
2779
A constant between 0 and 3 inclusive.
2780
 
2781
@item J
2782
A constant that has exactly one bit set.
2783
 
2784
@item K
2785
A constant that has exactly one bit clear.
2786
 
2787
@item L
2788
A constant between 0 and 255 inclusive.
2789
 
2790
@item M
2791
A constant between @minus{}255 and 0 inclusive.
2792
 
2793
@item N
2794
A constant between @minus{}3 and 0 inclusive.
2795
 
2796
@item O
2797
A constant between 1 and 4 inclusive.
2798
 
2799
@item P
2800
A constant between @minus{}4 and @minus{}1 inclusive.
2801
 
2802
@item Q
2803
A memory reference that is a stack push.
2804
 
2805
@item R
2806
A memory reference that is a stack pop.
2807
 
2808
@item S
2809
A memory reference that refers to a constant address of known value.
2810
 
2811
@item T
2812
The register indicated by Rx (not implemented yet).
2813
 
2814
@item U
2815
A constant that is not between 2 and 15 inclusive.
2816
 
2817
@item Z
2818
The constant 0.
2819
 
2820
@end table
2821
 
2822
@item Xtensa---@file{xtensa.h}
2823
@table @code
2824
@item a
2825
General-purpose 32-bit register
2826
 
2827
@item b
2828
One-bit boolean register
2829
 
2830
@item A
2831
MAC16 40-bit accumulator register
2832
 
2833
@item I
2834
Signed 12-bit integer constant, for use in MOVI instructions
2835
 
2836
@item J
2837
Signed 8-bit integer constant, for use in ADDI instructions
2838
 
2839
@item K
2840
Integer constant valid for BccI instructions
2841
 
2842
@item L
2843
Unsigned constant valid for BccUI instructions
2844
 
2845
@end table
2846
 
2847
@end table
2848
 
2849
@ifset INTERNALS
2850
@node Standard Names
2851
@section Standard Pattern Names For Generation
2852
@cindex standard pattern names
2853
@cindex pattern names
2854
@cindex names, pattern
2855
 
2856
Here is a table of the instruction names that are meaningful in the RTL
2857
generation pass of the compiler.  Giving one of these names to an
2858
instruction pattern tells the RTL generation pass that it can use the
2859
pattern to accomplish a certain task.
2860
 
2861
@table @asis
2862
@cindex @code{mov@var{m}} instruction pattern
2863
@item @samp{mov@var{m}}
2864
Here @var{m} stands for a two-letter machine mode name, in lowercase.
2865
This instruction pattern moves data with that machine mode from operand
2866
1 to operand 0.  For example, @samp{movsi} moves full-word data.
2867
 
2868
If operand 0 is a @code{subreg} with mode @var{m} of a register whose
2869
own mode is wider than @var{m}, the effect of this instruction is
2870
to store the specified value in the part of the register that corresponds
2871
to mode @var{m}.  Bits outside of @var{m}, but which are within the
2872
same target word as the @code{subreg} are undefined.  Bits which are
2873
outside the target word are left unchanged.
2874
 
2875
This class of patterns is special in several ways.  First of all, each
2876
of these names up to and including full word size @emph{must} be defined,
2877
because there is no other way to copy a datum from one place to another.
2878
If there are patterns accepting operands in larger modes,
2879
@samp{mov@var{m}} must be defined for integer modes of those sizes.
2880
 
2881
Second, these patterns are not used solely in the RTL generation pass.
2882
Even the reload pass can generate move insns to copy values from stack
2883
slots into temporary registers.  When it does so, one of the operands is
2884
a hard register and the other is an operand that can need to be reloaded
2885
into a register.
2886
 
2887
@findex force_reg
2888
Therefore, when given such a pair of operands, the pattern must generate
2889
RTL which needs no reloading and needs no temporary registers---no
2890
registers other than the operands.  For example, if you support the
2891
pattern with a @code{define_expand}, then in such a case the
2892
@code{define_expand} mustn't call @code{force_reg} or any other such
2893
function which might generate new pseudo registers.
2894
 
2895
This requirement exists even for subword modes on a RISC machine where
2896
fetching those modes from memory normally requires several insns and
2897
some temporary registers.
2898
 
2899
@findex change_address
2900
During reload a memory reference with an invalid address may be passed
2901
as an operand.  Such an address will be replaced with a valid address
2902
later in the reload pass.  In this case, nothing may be done with the
2903
address except to use it as it stands.  If it is copied, it will not be
2904
replaced with a valid address.  No attempt should be made to make such
2905
an address into a valid address and no routine (such as
2906
@code{change_address}) that will do so may be called.  Note that
2907
@code{general_operand} will fail when applied to such an address.
2908
 
2909
@findex reload_in_progress
2910
The global variable @code{reload_in_progress} (which must be explicitly
2911
declared if required) can be used to determine whether such special
2912
handling is required.
2913
 
2914
The variety of operands that have reloads depends on the rest of the
2915
machine description, but typically on a RISC machine these can only be
2916
pseudo registers that did not get hard registers, while on other
2917
machines explicit memory references will get optional reloads.
2918
 
2919
If a scratch register is required to move an object to or from memory,
2920
it can be allocated using @code{gen_reg_rtx} prior to life analysis.
2921
 
2922
If there are cases which need scratch registers during or after reload,
2923
you must define @code{SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS} and/or
2924
@code{SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS} to detect them, and provide
2925
patterns @samp{reload_in@var{m}} or @samp{reload_out@var{m}} to handle
2926
them.  @xref{Register Classes}.
2927
 
2928
@findex no_new_pseudos
2929
The global variable @code{no_new_pseudos} can be used to determine if it
2930
is unsafe to create new pseudo registers.  If this variable is nonzero, then
2931
it is unsafe to call @code{gen_reg_rtx} to allocate a new pseudo.
2932
 
2933
The constraints on a @samp{mov@var{m}} must permit moving any hard
2934
register to any other hard register provided that
2935
@code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} permits mode @var{m} in both registers and
2936
@code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST} applied to their classes returns a value of 2.
2937
 
2938
It is obligatory to support floating point @samp{mov@var{m}}
2939
instructions into and out of any registers that can hold fixed point
2940
values, because unions and structures (which have modes @code{SImode} or
2941
@code{DImode}) can be in those registers and they may have floating
2942
point members.
2943
 
2944
There may also be a need to support fixed point @samp{mov@var{m}}
2945
instructions in and out of floating point registers.  Unfortunately, I
2946
have forgotten why this was so, and I don't know whether it is still
2947
true.  If @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} rejects fixed point values in
2948
floating point registers, then the constraints of the fixed point
2949
@samp{mov@var{m}} instructions must be designed to avoid ever trying to
2950
reload into a floating point register.
2951
 
2952
@cindex @code{reload_in} instruction pattern
2953
@cindex @code{reload_out} instruction pattern
2954
@item @samp{reload_in@var{m}}
2955
@itemx @samp{reload_out@var{m}}
2956
Like @samp{mov@var{m}}, but used when a scratch register is required to
2957
move between operand 0 and operand 1.  Operand 2 describes the scratch
2958
register.  See the discussion of the @code{SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS}
2959
macro in @pxref{Register Classes}.
2960
 
2961
There are special restrictions on the form of the @code{match_operand}s
2962
used in these patterns.  First, only the predicate for the reload
2963
operand is examined, i.e., @code{reload_in} examines operand 1, but not
2964
the predicates for operand 0 or 2.  Second, there may be only one
2965
alternative in the constraints.  Third, only a single register class
2966
letter may be used for the constraint; subsequent constraint letters
2967
are ignored.  As a special exception, an empty constraint string
2968
matches the @code{ALL_REGS} register class.  This may relieve ports
2969
of the burden of defining an @code{ALL_REGS} constraint letter just
2970
for these patterns.
2971
 
2972
@cindex @code{movstrict@var{m}} instruction pattern
2973
@item @samp{movstrict@var{m}}
2974
Like @samp{mov@var{m}} except that if operand 0 is a @code{subreg}
2975
with mode @var{m} of a register whose natural mode is wider,
2976
the @samp{movstrict@var{m}} instruction is guaranteed not to alter
2977
any of the register except the part which belongs to mode @var{m}.
2978
 
2979
@cindex @code{movmisalign@var{m}} instruction pattern
2980
@item @samp{movmisalign@var{m}}
2981
This variant of a move pattern is designed to load or store a value
2982
from a memory address that is not naturally aligned for its mode.
2983
For a store, the memory will be in operand 0; for a load, the memory
2984
will be in operand 1.  The other operand is guaranteed not to be a
2985
memory, so that it's easy to tell whether this is a load or store.
2986
 
2987
This pattern is used by the autovectorizer, and when expanding a
2988
@code{MISALIGNED_INDIRECT_REF} expression.
2989
 
2990
@cindex @code{load_multiple} instruction pattern
2991
@item @samp{load_multiple}
2992
Load several consecutive memory locations into consecutive registers.
2993
Operand 0 is the first of the consecutive registers, operand 1
2994
is the first memory location, and operand 2 is a constant: the
2995
number of consecutive registers.
2996
 
2997
Define this only if the target machine really has such an instruction;
2998
do not define this if the most efficient way of loading consecutive
2999
registers from memory is to do them one at a time.
3000
 
3001
On some machines, there are restrictions as to which consecutive
3002
registers can be stored into memory, such as particular starting or
3003
ending register numbers or only a range of valid counts.  For those
3004
machines, use a @code{define_expand} (@pxref{Expander Definitions})
3005
and make the pattern fail if the restrictions are not met.
3006
 
3007
Write the generated insn as a @code{parallel} with elements being a
3008
@code{set} of one register from the appropriate memory location (you may
3009
also need @code{use} or @code{clobber} elements).  Use a
3010
@code{match_parallel} (@pxref{RTL Template}) to recognize the insn.  See
3011
@file{rs6000.md} for examples of the use of this insn pattern.
3012
 
3013
@cindex @samp{store_multiple} instruction pattern
3014
@item @samp{store_multiple}
3015
Similar to @samp{load_multiple}, but store several consecutive registers
3016
into consecutive memory locations.  Operand 0 is the first of the
3017
consecutive memory locations, operand 1 is the first register, and
3018
operand 2 is a constant: the number of consecutive registers.
3019
 
3020
@cindex @code{vec_set@var{m}} instruction pattern
3021
@item @samp{vec_set@var{m}}
3022
Set given field in the vector value.  Operand 0 is the vector to modify,
3023
operand 1 is new value of field and operand 2 specify the field index.
3024
 
3025
@cindex @code{vec_extract@var{m}} instruction pattern
3026
@item @samp{vec_extract@var{m}}
3027
Extract given field from the vector value.  Operand 1 is the vector, operand 2
3028
specify field index and operand 0 place to store value into.
3029
 
3030
@cindex @code{vec_init@var{m}} instruction pattern
3031
@item @samp{vec_init@var{m}}
3032
Initialize the vector to given values.  Operand 0 is the vector to initialize
3033
and operand 1 is parallel containing values for individual fields.
3034
 
3035
@cindex @code{push@var{m}1} instruction pattern
3036
@item @samp{push@var{m}1}
3037
Output a push instruction.  Operand 0 is value to push.  Used only when
3038
@code{PUSH_ROUNDING} is defined.  For historical reason, this pattern may be
3039
missing and in such case an @code{mov} expander is used instead, with a
3040
@code{MEM} expression forming the push operation.  The @code{mov} expander
3041
method is deprecated.
3042
 
3043
@cindex @code{add@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3044
@item @samp{add@var{m}3}
3045
Add operand 2 and operand 1, storing the result in operand 0.  All operands
3046
must have mode @var{m}.  This can be used even on two-address machines, by
3047
means of constraints requiring operands 1 and 0 to be the same location.
3048
 
3049
@cindex @code{sub@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3050
@cindex @code{mul@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3051
@cindex @code{div@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3052
@cindex @code{udiv@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3053
@cindex @code{mod@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3054
@cindex @code{umod@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3055
@cindex @code{umin@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3056
@cindex @code{umax@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3057
@cindex @code{and@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3058
@cindex @code{ior@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3059
@cindex @code{xor@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3060
@item @samp{sub@var{m}3}, @samp{mul@var{m}3}
3061
@itemx @samp{div@var{m}3}, @samp{udiv@var{m}3}
3062
@itemx @samp{mod@var{m}3}, @samp{umod@var{m}3}
3063
@itemx @samp{umin@var{m}3}, @samp{umax@var{m}3}
3064
@itemx @samp{and@var{m}3}, @samp{ior@var{m}3}, @samp{xor@var{m}3}
3065
Similar, for other arithmetic operations.
3066
 
3067
@cindex @code{min@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3068
@cindex @code{max@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3069
@item @samp{smin@var{m}3}, @samp{smax@var{m}3}
3070
Signed minimum and maximum operations.  When used with floating point,
3071
if both operands are zeros, or if either operand is @code{NaN}, then
3072
it is unspecified which of the two operands is returned as the result.
3073
 
3074
@cindex @code{reduc_smin_@var{m}} instruction pattern
3075
@cindex @code{reduc_smax_@var{m}} instruction pattern
3076
@item @samp{reduc_smin_@var{m}}, @samp{reduc_smax_@var{m}}
3077
Find the signed minimum/maximum of the elements of a vector. The vector is
3078
operand 1, and the scalar result is stored in the least significant bits of
3079
operand 0 (also a vector). The output and input vector should have the same
3080
modes.
3081
 
3082
@cindex @code{reduc_umin_@var{m}} instruction pattern
3083
@cindex @code{reduc_umax_@var{m}} instruction pattern
3084
@item @samp{reduc_umin_@var{m}}, @samp{reduc_umax_@var{m}}
3085
Find the unsigned minimum/maximum of the elements of a vector. The vector is
3086
operand 1, and the scalar result is stored in the least significant bits of
3087
operand 0 (also a vector). The output and input vector should have the same
3088
modes.
3089
 
3090
@cindex @code{reduc_splus_@var{m}} instruction pattern
3091
@item @samp{reduc_splus_@var{m}}
3092
Compute the sum of the signed elements of a vector. The vector is operand 1,
3093
and the scalar result is stored in the least significant bits of operand 0
3094
(also a vector). The output and input vector should have the same modes.
3095
 
3096
@cindex @code{reduc_uplus_@var{m}} instruction pattern
3097
@item @samp{reduc_uplus_@var{m}}
3098
Compute the sum of the unsigned elements of a vector. The vector is operand 1,
3099
and the scalar result is stored in the least significant bits of operand 0
3100
(also a vector). The output and input vector should have the same modes.
3101
 
3102
@cindex @code{vec_shl_@var{m}} instruction pattern
3103
@cindex @code{vec_shr_@var{m}} instruction pattern
3104
@item @samp{vec_shl_@var{m}}, @samp{vec_shr_@var{m}}
3105
Whole vector left/right shift in bits.
3106
Operand 1 is a vector to be shifted.
3107
Operand 2 is an integer shift amount in bits.
3108
Operand 0 is where the resulting shifted vector is stored.
3109
The output and input vectors should have the same modes.
3110
 
3111
@cindex @code{mulhisi3} instruction pattern
3112
@item @samp{mulhisi3}
3113
Multiply operands 1 and 2, which have mode @code{HImode}, and store
3114
a @code{SImode} product in operand 0.
3115
 
3116
@cindex @code{mulqihi3} instruction pattern
3117
@cindex @code{mulsidi3} instruction pattern
3118
@item @samp{mulqihi3}, @samp{mulsidi3}
3119
Similar widening-multiplication instructions of other widths.
3120
 
3121
@cindex @code{umulqihi3} instruction pattern
3122
@cindex @code{umulhisi3} instruction pattern
3123
@cindex @code{umulsidi3} instruction pattern
3124
@item @samp{umulqihi3}, @samp{umulhisi3}, @samp{umulsidi3}
3125
Similar widening-multiplication instructions that do unsigned
3126
multiplication.
3127
 
3128
@cindex @code{smul@var{m}3_highpart} instruction pattern
3129
@item @samp{smul@var{m}3_highpart}
3130
Perform a signed multiplication of operands 1 and 2, which have mode
3131
@var{m}, and store the most significant half of the product in operand 0.
3132
The least significant half of the product is discarded.
3133
 
3134
@cindex @code{umul@var{m}3_highpart} instruction pattern
3135
@item @samp{umul@var{m}3_highpart}
3136
Similar, but the multiplication is unsigned.
3137
 
3138
@cindex @code{divmod@var{m}4} instruction pattern
3139
@item @samp{divmod@var{m}4}
3140
Signed division that produces both a quotient and a remainder.
3141
Operand 1 is divided by operand 2 to produce a quotient stored
3142
in operand 0 and a remainder stored in operand 3.
3143
 
3144
For machines with an instruction that produces both a quotient and a
3145
remainder, provide a pattern for @samp{divmod@var{m}4} but do not
3146
provide patterns for @samp{div@var{m}3} and @samp{mod@var{m}3}.  This
3147
allows optimization in the relatively common case when both the quotient
3148
and remainder are computed.
3149
 
3150
If an instruction that just produces a quotient or just a remainder
3151
exists and is more efficient than the instruction that produces both,
3152
write the output routine of @samp{divmod@var{m}4} to call
3153
@code{find_reg_note} and look for a @code{REG_UNUSED} note on the
3154
quotient or remainder and generate the appropriate instruction.
3155
 
3156
@cindex @code{udivmod@var{m}4} instruction pattern
3157
@item @samp{udivmod@var{m}4}
3158
Similar, but does unsigned division.
3159
 
3160
@anchor{shift patterns}
3161
@cindex @code{ashl@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3162
@item @samp{ashl@var{m}3}
3163
Arithmetic-shift operand 1 left by a number of bits specified by operand
3164
2, and store the result in operand 0.  Here @var{m} is the mode of
3165
operand 0 and operand 1; operand 2's mode is specified by the
3166
instruction pattern, and the compiler will convert the operand to that
3167
mode before generating the instruction.  The meaning of out-of-range shift
3168
counts can optionally be specified by @code{TARGET_SHIFT_TRUNCATION_MASK}.
3169
@xref{TARGET_SHIFT_TRUNCATION_MASK}.
3170
 
3171
@cindex @code{ashr@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3172
@cindex @code{lshr@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3173
@cindex @code{rotl@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3174
@cindex @code{rotr@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3175
@item @samp{ashr@var{m}3}, @samp{lshr@var{m}3}, @samp{rotl@var{m}3}, @samp{rotr@var{m}3}
3176
Other shift and rotate instructions, analogous to the
3177
@code{ashl@var{m}3} instructions.
3178
 
3179
@cindex @code{neg@var{m}2} instruction pattern
3180
@item @samp{neg@var{m}2}
3181
Negate operand 1 and store the result in operand 0.
3182
 
3183
@cindex @code{abs@var{m}2} instruction pattern
3184
@item @samp{abs@var{m}2}
3185
Store the absolute value of operand 1 into operand 0.
3186
 
3187
@cindex @code{sqrt@var{m}2} instruction pattern
3188
@item @samp{sqrt@var{m}2}
3189
Store the square root of operand 1 into operand 0.
3190
 
3191
The @code{sqrt} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
3192
corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{sqrtf}
3193
built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
3194
type @code{float}.
3195
 
3196
@cindex @code{cos@var{m}2} instruction pattern
3197
@item @samp{cos@var{m}2}
3198
Store the cosine of operand 1 into operand 0.
3199
 
3200
The @code{cos} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
3201
corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{cosf}
3202
built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
3203
type @code{float}.
3204
 
3205
@cindex @code{sin@var{m}2} instruction pattern
3206
@item @samp{sin@var{m}2}
3207
Store the sine of operand 1 into operand 0.
3208
 
3209
The @code{sin} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
3210
corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{sinf}
3211
built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
3212
type @code{float}.
3213
 
3214
@cindex @code{exp@var{m}2} instruction pattern
3215
@item @samp{exp@var{m}2}
3216
Store the exponential of operand 1 into operand 0.
3217
 
3218
The @code{exp} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
3219
corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{expf}
3220
built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
3221
type @code{float}.
3222
 
3223
@cindex @code{log@var{m}2} instruction pattern
3224
@item @samp{log@var{m}2}
3225
Store the natural logarithm of operand 1 into operand 0.
3226
 
3227
The @code{log} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
3228
corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{logf}
3229
built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
3230
type @code{float}.
3231
 
3232
@cindex @code{pow@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3233
@item @samp{pow@var{m}3}
3234
Store the value of operand 1 raised to the exponent operand 2
3235
into operand 0.
3236
 
3237
The @code{pow} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
3238
corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{powf}
3239
built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
3240
type @code{float}.
3241
 
3242
@cindex @code{atan2@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3243
@item @samp{atan2@var{m}3}
3244
Store the arc tangent (inverse tangent) of operand 1 divided by
3245
operand 2 into operand 0, using the signs of both arguments to
3246
determine the quadrant of the result.
3247
 
3248
The @code{atan2} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
3249
corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{atan2f}
3250
built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
3251
type @code{float}.
3252
 
3253
@cindex @code{floor@var{m}2} instruction pattern
3254
@item @samp{floor@var{m}2}
3255
Store the largest integral value not greater than argument.
3256
 
3257
The @code{floor} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
3258
corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{floorf}
3259
built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
3260
type @code{float}.
3261
 
3262
@cindex @code{btrunc@var{m}2} instruction pattern
3263
@item @samp{btrunc@var{m}2}
3264
Store the argument rounded to integer towards zero.
3265
 
3266
The @code{trunc} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
3267
corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{truncf}
3268
built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
3269
type @code{float}.
3270
 
3271
@cindex @code{round@var{m}2} instruction pattern
3272
@item @samp{round@var{m}2}
3273
Store the argument rounded to integer away from zero.
3274
 
3275
The @code{round} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
3276
corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{roundf}
3277
built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
3278
type @code{float}.
3279
 
3280
@cindex @code{ceil@var{m}2} instruction pattern
3281
@item @samp{ceil@var{m}2}
3282
Store the argument rounded to integer away from zero.
3283
 
3284
The @code{ceil} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
3285
corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{ceilf}
3286
built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
3287
type @code{float}.
3288
 
3289
@cindex @code{nearbyint@var{m}2} instruction pattern
3290
@item @samp{nearbyint@var{m}2}
3291
Store the argument rounded according to the default rounding mode
3292
 
3293
The @code{nearbyint} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
3294
corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{nearbyintf}
3295
built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
3296
type @code{float}.
3297
 
3298
@cindex @code{rint@var{m}2} instruction pattern
3299
@item @samp{rint@var{m}2}
3300
Store the argument rounded according to the default rounding mode and
3301
raise the inexact exception when the result differs in value from
3302
the argument
3303
 
3304
The @code{rint} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
3305
corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{rintf}
3306
built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
3307
type @code{float}.
3308
 
3309
@cindex @code{copysign@var{m}3} instruction pattern
3310
@item @samp{copysign@var{m}3}
3311
Store a value with the magnitude of operand 1 and the sign of operand
3312
2 into operand 0.
3313
 
3314
The @code{copysign} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
3315
corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{copysignf}
3316
built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data
3317
type @code{float}.
3318
 
3319
@cindex @code{ffs@var{m}2} instruction pattern
3320
@item @samp{ffs@var{m}2}
3321
Store into operand 0 one plus the index of the least significant 1-bit
3322
of operand 1.  If operand 1 is zero, store zero.  @var{m} is the mode
3323
of operand 0; operand 1's mode is specified by the instruction
3324
pattern, and the compiler will convert the operand to that mode before
3325
generating the instruction.
3326
 
3327
The @code{ffs} built-in function of C always uses the mode which
3328
corresponds to the C data type @code{int}.
3329
 
3330
@cindex @code{clz@var{m}2} instruction pattern
3331
@item @samp{clz@var{m}2}
3332
Store into operand 0 the number of leading 0-bits in @var{x}, starting
3333
at the most significant bit position.  If @var{x} is 0, the result is
3334
undefined.  @var{m} is the mode of operand 0; operand 1's mode is
3335
specified by the instruction pattern, and the compiler will convert the
3336
operand to that mode before generating the instruction.
3337
 
3338
@cindex @code{ctz@var{m}2} instruction pattern
3339
@item @samp{ctz@var{m}2}
3340
Store into operand 0 the number of trailing 0-bits in @var{x}, starting
3341
at the least significant bit position.  If @var{x} is 0, the result is
3342
undefined.  @var{m} is the mode of operand 0; operand 1's mode is
3343
specified by the instruction pattern, and the compiler will convert the
3344
operand to that mode before generating the instruction.
3345
 
3346
@cindex @code{popcount@var{m}2} instruction pattern
3347
@item @samp{popcount@var{m}2}
3348
Store into operand 0 the number of 1-bits in @var{x}.  @var{m} is the
3349
mode of operand 0; operand 1's mode is specified by the instruction
3350
pattern, and the compiler will convert the operand to that mode before
3351
generating the instruction.
3352
 
3353
@cindex @code{parity@var{m}2} instruction pattern
3354
@item @samp{parity@var{m}2}
3355
Store into operand 0 the parity of @var{x}, i.e.@: the number of 1-bits
3356
in @var{x} modulo 2.  @var{m} is the mode of operand 0; operand 1's mode
3357
is specified by the instruction pattern, and the compiler will convert
3358
the operand to that mode before generating the instruction.
3359
 
3360
@cindex @code{one_cmpl@var{m}2} instruction pattern
3361
@item @samp{one_cmpl@var{m}2}
3362
Store the bitwise-complement of operand 1 into operand 0.
3363
 
3364
@cindex @code{cmp@var{m}} instruction pattern
3365
@item @samp{cmp@var{m}}
3366
Compare operand 0 and operand 1, and set the condition codes.
3367
The RTL pattern should look like this:
3368
 
3369
@smallexample
3370
(set (cc0) (compare (match_operand:@var{m} 0 @dots{})
3371
                    (match_operand:@var{m} 1 @dots{})))
3372
@end smallexample
3373
 
3374
@cindex @code{tst@var{m}} instruction pattern
3375
@item @samp{tst@var{m}}
3376
Compare operand 0 against zero, and set the condition codes.
3377
The RTL pattern should look like this:
3378
 
3379
@smallexample
3380
(set (cc0) (match_operand:@var{m} 0 @dots{}))
3381
@end smallexample
3382
 
3383
@samp{tst@var{m}} patterns should not be defined for machines that do
3384
not use @code{(cc0)}.  Doing so would confuse the optimizer since it
3385
would no longer be clear which @code{set} operations were comparisons.
3386
The @samp{cmp@var{m}} patterns should be used instead.
3387
 
3388
@cindex @code{movmem@var{m}} instruction pattern
3389
@item @samp{movmem@var{m}}
3390
Block move instruction.  The destination and source blocks of memory
3391
are the first two operands, and both are @code{mem:BLK}s with an
3392
address in mode @code{Pmode}.
3393
 
3394
The number of bytes to move is the third operand, in mode @var{m}.
3395
Usually, you specify @code{word_mode} for @var{m}.  However, if you can
3396
generate better code knowing the range of valid lengths is smaller than
3397
those representable in a full word, you should provide a pattern with a
3398
mode corresponding to the range of values you can handle efficiently
3399
(e.g., @code{QImode} for values in the range 0--127; note we avoid numbers
3400
that appear negative) and also a pattern with @code{word_mode}.
3401
 
3402
The fourth operand is the known shared alignment of the source and
3403
destination, in the form of a @code{const_int} rtx.  Thus, if the
3404
compiler knows that both source and destination are word-aligned,
3405
it may provide the value 4 for this operand.
3406
 
3407
Descriptions of multiple @code{movmem@var{m}} patterns can only be
3408
beneficial if the patterns for smaller modes have fewer restrictions
3409
on their first, second and fourth operands.  Note that the mode @var{m}
3410
in @code{movmem@var{m}} does not impose any restriction on the mode of
3411
individually moved data units in the block.
3412
 
3413
These patterns need not give special consideration to the possibility
3414
that the source and destination strings might overlap.
3415
 
3416
@cindex @code{movstr} instruction pattern
3417
@item @samp{movstr}
3418
String copy instruction, with @code{stpcpy} semantics.  Operand 0 is
3419
an output operand in mode @code{Pmode}.  The addresses of the
3420
destination and source strings are operands 1 and 2, and both are
3421
@code{mem:BLK}s with addresses in mode @code{Pmode}.  The execution of
3422
the expansion of this pattern should store in operand 0 the address in
3423
which the @code{NUL} terminator was stored in the destination string.
3424
 
3425
@cindex @code{setmem@var{m}} instruction pattern
3426
@item @samp{setmem@var{m}}
3427
Block set instruction.  The destination string is the first operand,
3428
given as a @code{mem:BLK} whose address is in mode @code{Pmode}.  The
3429
number of bytes to set is the second operand, in mode @var{m}.  The value to
3430
initialize the memory with is the third operand. Targets that only support the
3431
clearing of memory should reject any value that is not the constant 0.  See
3432
@samp{movmem@var{m}} for a discussion of the choice of mode.
3433
 
3434
The fourth operand is the known alignment of the destination, in the form
3435
of a @code{const_int} rtx.  Thus, if the compiler knows that the
3436
destination is word-aligned, it may provide the value 4 for this
3437
operand.
3438
 
3439
The use for multiple @code{setmem@var{m}} is as for @code{movmem@var{m}}.
3440
 
3441
@cindex @code{cmpstrn@var{m}} instruction pattern
3442
@item @samp{cmpstrn@var{m}}
3443
String compare instruction, with five operands.  Operand 0 is the output;
3444
it has mode @var{m}.  The remaining four operands are like the operands
3445
of @samp{movmem@var{m}}.  The two memory blocks specified are compared
3446
byte by byte in lexicographic order starting at the beginning of each
3447
string.  The instruction is not allowed to prefetch more than one byte
3448
at a time since either string may end in the first byte and reading past
3449
that may access an invalid page or segment and cause a fault.  The
3450
effect of the instruction is to store a value in operand 0 whose sign
3451
indicates the result of the comparison.
3452
 
3453
@cindex @code{cmpstr@var{m}} instruction pattern
3454
@item @samp{cmpstr@var{m}}
3455
String compare instruction, without known maximum length.  Operand 0 is the
3456
output; it has mode @var{m}.  The second and third operand are the blocks of
3457
memory to be compared; both are @code{mem:BLK} with an address in mode
3458
@code{Pmode}.
3459
 
3460
The fourth operand is the known shared alignment of the source and
3461
destination, in the form of a @code{const_int} rtx.  Thus, if the
3462
compiler knows that both source and destination are word-aligned,
3463
it may provide the value 4 for this operand.
3464
 
3465
The two memory blocks specified are compared byte by byte in lexicographic
3466
order starting at the beginning of each string.  The instruction is not allowed
3467
to prefetch more than one byte at a time since either string may end in the
3468
first byte and reading past that may access an invalid page or segment and
3469
cause a fault.  The effect of the instruction is to store a value in operand 0
3470
whose sign indicates the result of the comparison.
3471
 
3472
@cindex @code{cmpmem@var{m}} instruction pattern
3473
@item @samp{cmpmem@var{m}}
3474
Block compare instruction, with five operands like the operands
3475
of @samp{cmpstr@var{m}}.  The two memory blocks specified are compared
3476
byte by byte in lexicographic order starting at the beginning of each
3477
block.  Unlike @samp{cmpstr@var{m}} the instruction can prefetch
3478
any bytes in the two memory blocks.  The effect of the instruction is
3479
to store a value in operand 0 whose sign indicates the result of the
3480
comparison.
3481
 
3482
@cindex @code{strlen@var{m}} instruction pattern
3483
@item @samp{strlen@var{m}}
3484
Compute the length of a string, with three operands.
3485
Operand 0 is the result (of mode @var{m}), operand 1 is
3486
a @code{mem} referring to the first character of the string,
3487
operand 2 is the character to search for (normally zero),
3488
and operand 3 is a constant describing the known alignment
3489
of the beginning of the string.
3490
 
3491
@cindex @code{float@var{mn}2} instruction pattern
3492
@item @samp{float@var{m}@var{n}2}
3493
Convert signed integer operand 1 (valid for fixed point mode @var{m}) to
3494
floating point mode @var{n} and store in operand 0 (which has mode
3495
@var{n}).
3496
 
3497
@cindex @code{floatuns@var{mn}2} instruction pattern
3498
@item @samp{floatuns@var{m}@var{n}2}
3499
Convert unsigned integer operand 1 (valid for fixed point mode @var{m})
3500
to floating point mode @var{n} and store in operand 0 (which has mode
3501
@var{n}).
3502
 
3503
@cindex @code{fix@var{mn}2} instruction pattern
3504
@item @samp{fix@var{m}@var{n}2}
3505
Convert operand 1 (valid for floating point mode @var{m}) to fixed
3506
point mode @var{n} as a signed number and store in operand 0 (which
3507
has mode @var{n}).  This instruction's result is defined only when
3508
the value of operand 1 is an integer.
3509
 
3510
If the machine description defines this pattern, it also needs to
3511
define the @code{ftrunc} pattern.
3512
 
3513
@cindex @code{fixuns@var{mn}2} instruction pattern
3514
@item @samp{fixuns@var{m}@var{n}2}
3515
Convert operand 1 (valid for floating point mode @var{m}) to fixed
3516
point mode @var{n} as an unsigned number and store in operand 0 (which
3517
has mode @var{n}).  This instruction's result is defined only when the
3518
value of operand 1 is an integer.
3519
 
3520
@cindex @code{ftrunc@var{m}2} instruction pattern
3521
@item @samp{ftrunc@var{m}2}
3522
Convert operand 1 (valid for floating point mode @var{m}) to an
3523
integer value, still represented in floating point mode @var{m}, and
3524
store it in operand 0 (valid for floating point mode @var{m}).
3525
 
3526
@cindex @code{fix_trunc@var{mn}2} instruction pattern
3527
@item @samp{fix_trunc@var{m}@var{n}2}
3528
Like @samp{fix@var{m}@var{n}2} but works for any floating point value
3529
of mode @var{m} by converting the value to an integer.
3530
 
3531
@cindex @code{fixuns_trunc@var{mn}2} instruction pattern
3532
@item @samp{fixuns_trunc@var{m}@var{n}2}
3533
Like @samp{fixuns@var{m}@var{n}2} but works for any floating point
3534
value of mode @var{m} by converting the value to an integer.
3535
 
3536
@cindex @code{trunc@var{mn}2} instruction pattern
3537
@item @samp{trunc@var{m}@var{n}2}
3538
Truncate operand 1 (valid for mode @var{m}) to mode @var{n} and
3539
store in operand 0 (which has mode @var{n}).  Both modes must be fixed
3540
point or both floating point.
3541
 
3542
@cindex @code{extend@var{mn}2} instruction pattern
3543
@item @samp{extend@var{m}@var{n}2}
3544
Sign-extend operand 1 (valid for mode @var{m}) to mode @var{n} and
3545
store in operand 0 (which has mode @var{n}).  Both modes must be fixed
3546
point or both floating point.
3547
 
3548
@cindex @code{zero_extend@var{mn}2} instruction pattern
3549
@item @samp{zero_extend@var{m}@var{n}2}
3550
Zero-extend operand 1 (valid for mode @var{m}) to mode @var{n} and
3551
store in operand 0 (which has mode @var{n}).  Both modes must be fixed
3552
point.
3553
 
3554
@cindex @code{extv} instruction pattern
3555
@item @samp{extv}
3556
Extract a bit-field from operand 1 (a register or memory operand), where
3557
operand 2 specifies the width in bits and operand 3 the starting bit,
3558
and store it in operand 0.  Operand 0 must have mode @code{word_mode}.
3559
Operand 1 may have mode @code{byte_mode} or @code{word_mode}; often
3560
@code{word_mode} is allowed only for registers.  Operands 2 and 3 must
3561
be valid for @code{word_mode}.
3562
 
3563
The RTL generation pass generates this instruction only with constants
3564
for operands 2 and 3 and the constant is never zero for operand 2.
3565
 
3566
The bit-field value is sign-extended to a full word integer
3567
before it is stored in operand 0.
3568
 
3569
@cindex @code{extzv} instruction pattern
3570
@item @samp{extzv}
3571
Like @samp{extv} except that the bit-field value is zero-extended.
3572
 
3573
@cindex @code{insv} instruction pattern
3574
@item @samp{insv}
3575
Store operand 3 (which must be valid for @code{word_mode}) into a
3576
bit-field in operand 0, where operand 1 specifies the width in bits and
3577
operand 2 the starting bit.  Operand 0 may have mode @code{byte_mode} or
3578
@code{word_mode}; often @code{word_mode} is allowed only for registers.
3579
Operands 1 and 2 must be valid for @code{word_mode}.
3580
 
3581
The RTL generation pass generates this instruction only with constants
3582
for operands 1 and 2 and the constant is never zero for operand 1.
3583
 
3584
@cindex @code{mov@var{mode}cc} instruction pattern
3585
@item @samp{mov@var{mode}cc}
3586
Conditionally move operand 2 or operand 3 into operand 0 according to the
3587
comparison in operand 1.  If the comparison is true, operand 2 is moved
3588
into operand 0, otherwise operand 3 is moved.
3589
 
3590
The mode of the operands being compared need not be the same as the operands
3591
being moved.  Some machines, sparc64 for example, have instructions that
3592
conditionally move an integer value based on the floating point condition
3593
codes and vice versa.
3594
 
3595
If the machine does not have conditional move instructions, do not
3596
define these patterns.
3597
 
3598
@cindex @code{add@var{mode}cc} instruction pattern
3599
@item @samp{add@var{mode}cc}
3600
Similar to @samp{mov@var{mode}cc} but for conditional addition.  Conditionally
3601
move operand 2 or (operands 2 + operand 3) into operand 0 according to the
3602
comparison in operand 1.  If the comparison is true, operand 2 is moved into
3603
operand 0, otherwise (operand 2 + operand 3) is moved.
3604
 
3605
@cindex @code{s@var{cond}} instruction pattern
3606
@item @samp{s@var{cond}}
3607
Store zero or nonzero in the operand according to the condition codes.
3608
Value stored is nonzero iff the condition @var{cond} is true.
3609
@var{cond} is the name of a comparison operation expression code, such
3610
as @code{eq}, @code{lt} or @code{leu}.
3611
 
3612
You specify the mode that the operand must have when you write the
3613
@code{match_operand} expression.  The compiler automatically sees
3614
which mode you have used and supplies an operand of that mode.
3615
 
3616
The value stored for a true condition must have 1 as its low bit, or
3617
else must be negative.  Otherwise the instruction is not suitable and
3618
you should omit it from the machine description.  You describe to the
3619
compiler exactly which value is stored by defining the macro
3620
@code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} (@pxref{Misc}).  If a description cannot be
3621
found that can be used for all the @samp{s@var{cond}} patterns, you
3622
should omit those operations from the machine description.
3623
 
3624
These operations may fail, but should do so only in relatively
3625
uncommon cases; if they would fail for common cases involving
3626
integer comparisons, it is best to omit these patterns.
3627
 
3628
If these operations are omitted, the compiler will usually generate code
3629
that copies the constant one to the target and branches around an
3630
assignment of zero to the target.  If this code is more efficient than
3631
the potential instructions used for the @samp{s@var{cond}} pattern
3632
followed by those required to convert the result into a 1 or a zero in
3633
@code{SImode}, you should omit the @samp{s@var{cond}} operations from
3634
the machine description.
3635
 
3636
@cindex @code{b@var{cond}} instruction pattern
3637
@item @samp{b@var{cond}}
3638
Conditional branch instruction.  Operand 0 is a @code{label_ref} that
3639
refers to the label to jump to.  Jump if the condition codes meet
3640
condition @var{cond}.
3641
 
3642
Some machines do not follow the model assumed here where a comparison
3643
instruction is followed by a conditional branch instruction.  In that
3644
case, the @samp{cmp@var{m}} (and @samp{tst@var{m}}) patterns should
3645
simply store the operands away and generate all the required insns in a
3646
@code{define_expand} (@pxref{Expander Definitions}) for the conditional
3647
branch operations.  All calls to expand @samp{b@var{cond}} patterns are
3648
immediately preceded by calls to expand either a @samp{cmp@var{m}}
3649
pattern or a @samp{tst@var{m}} pattern.
3650
 
3651
Machines that use a pseudo register for the condition code value, or
3652
where the mode used for the comparison depends on the condition being
3653
tested, should also use the above mechanism.  @xref{Jump Patterns}.
3654
 
3655
The above discussion also applies to the @samp{mov@var{mode}cc} and
3656
@samp{s@var{cond}} patterns.
3657
 
3658
@cindex @code{cbranch@var{mode}4} instruction pattern
3659
@item @samp{cbranch@var{mode}4}
3660
Conditional branch instruction combined with a compare instruction.
3661
Operand 0 is a comparison operator.  Operand 1 and operand 2 are the
3662
first and second operands of the comparison, respectively.  Operand 3
3663
is a @code{label_ref} that refers to the label to jump to.
3664
 
3665
@cindex @code{jump} instruction pattern
3666
@item @samp{jump}
3667
A jump inside a function; an unconditional branch.  Operand 0 is the
3668
@code{label_ref} of the label to jump to.  This pattern name is mandatory
3669
on all machines.
3670
 
3671
@cindex @code{call} instruction pattern
3672
@item @samp{call}
3673
Subroutine call instruction returning no value.  Operand 0 is the
3674
function to call; operand 1 is the number of bytes of arguments pushed
3675
as a @code{const_int}; operand 2 is the number of registers used as
3676
operands.
3677
 
3678
On most machines, operand 2 is not actually stored into the RTL
3679
pattern.  It is supplied for the sake of some RISC machines which need
3680
to put this information into the assembler code; they can put it in
3681
the RTL instead of operand 1.
3682
 
3683
Operand 0 should be a @code{mem} RTX whose address is the address of the
3684
function.  Note, however, that this address can be a @code{symbol_ref}
3685
expression even if it would not be a legitimate memory address on the
3686
target machine.  If it is also not a valid argument for a call
3687
instruction, the pattern for this operation should be a
3688
@code{define_expand} (@pxref{Expander Definitions}) that places the
3689
address into a register and uses that register in the call instruction.
3690
 
3691
@cindex @code{call_value} instruction pattern
3692
@item @samp{call_value}
3693
Subroutine call instruction returning a value.  Operand 0 is the hard
3694
register in which the value is returned.  There are three more
3695
operands, the same as the three operands of the @samp{call}
3696
instruction (but with numbers increased by one).
3697
 
3698
Subroutines that return @code{BLKmode} objects use the @samp{call}
3699
insn.
3700
 
3701
@cindex @code{call_pop} instruction pattern
3702
@cindex @code{call_value_pop} instruction pattern
3703
@item @samp{call_pop}, @samp{call_value_pop}
3704
Similar to @samp{call} and @samp{call_value}, except used if defined and
3705
if @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS} is nonzero.  They should emit a @code{parallel}
3706
that contains both the function call and a @code{set} to indicate the
3707
adjustment made to the frame pointer.
3708
 
3709
For machines where @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS} can be nonzero, the use of these
3710
patterns increases the number of functions for which the frame pointer
3711
can be eliminated, if desired.
3712
 
3713
@cindex @code{untyped_call} instruction pattern
3714
@item @samp{untyped_call}
3715
Subroutine call instruction returning a value of any type.  Operand 0 is
3716
the function to call; operand 1 is a memory location where the result of
3717
calling the function is to be stored; operand 2 is a @code{parallel}
3718
expression where each element is a @code{set} expression that indicates
3719
the saving of a function return value into the result block.
3720
 
3721
This instruction pattern should be defined to support
3722
@code{__builtin_apply} on machines where special instructions are needed
3723
to call a subroutine with arbitrary arguments or to save the value
3724
returned.  This instruction pattern is required on machines that have
3725
multiple registers that can hold a return value
3726
(i.e.@: @code{FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P} is true for more than one register).
3727
 
3728
@cindex @code{return} instruction pattern
3729
@item @samp{return}
3730
Subroutine return instruction.  This instruction pattern name should be
3731
defined only if a single instruction can do all the work of returning
3732
from a function.
3733
 
3734
Like the @samp{mov@var{m}} patterns, this pattern is also used after the
3735
RTL generation phase.  In this case it is to support machines where
3736
multiple instructions are usually needed to return from a function, but
3737
some class of functions only requires one instruction to implement a
3738
return.  Normally, the applicable functions are those which do not need
3739
to save any registers or allocate stack space.
3740
 
3741
@findex reload_completed
3742
@findex leaf_function_p
3743
For such machines, the condition specified in this pattern should only
3744
be true when @code{reload_completed} is nonzero and the function's
3745
epilogue would only be a single instruction.  For machines with register
3746
windows, the routine @code{leaf_function_p} may be used to determine if
3747
a register window push is required.
3748
 
3749
Machines that have conditional return instructions should define patterns
3750
such as
3751
 
3752
@smallexample
3753
(define_insn ""
3754
  [(set (pc)
3755
        (if_then_else (match_operator
3756
 
3757
                         [(cc0) (const_int 0)])
3758
                      (return)
3759
                      (pc)))]
3760
  "@var{condition}"
3761
  "@dots{}")
3762
@end smallexample
3763
 
3764
where @var{condition} would normally be the same condition specified on the
3765
named @samp{return} pattern.
3766
 
3767
@cindex @code{untyped_return} instruction pattern
3768
@item @samp{untyped_return}
3769
Untyped subroutine return instruction.  This instruction pattern should
3770
be defined to support @code{__builtin_return} on machines where special
3771
instructions are needed to return a value of any type.
3772
 
3773
Operand 0 is a memory location where the result of calling a function
3774
with @code{__builtin_apply} is stored; operand 1 is a @code{parallel}
3775
expression where each element is a @code{set} expression that indicates
3776
the restoring of a function return value from the result block.
3777
 
3778
@cindex @code{nop} instruction pattern
3779
@item @samp{nop}
3780
No-op instruction.  This instruction pattern name should always be defined
3781
to output a no-op in assembler code.  @code{(const_int 0)} will do as an
3782
RTL pattern.
3783
 
3784
@cindex @code{indirect_jump} instruction pattern
3785
@item @samp{indirect_jump}
3786
An instruction to jump to an address which is operand zero.
3787
This pattern name is mandatory on all machines.
3788
 
3789
@cindex @code{casesi} instruction pattern
3790
@item @samp{casesi}
3791
Instruction to jump through a dispatch table, including bounds checking.
3792
This instruction takes five operands:
3793
 
3794
@enumerate
3795
@item
3796
The index to dispatch on, which has mode @code{SImode}.
3797
 
3798
@item
3799
The lower bound for indices in the table, an integer constant.
3800
 
3801
@item
3802
The total range of indices in the table---the largest index
3803
minus the smallest one (both inclusive).
3804
 
3805
@item
3806
A label that precedes the table itself.
3807
 
3808
@item
3809
A label to jump to if the index has a value outside the bounds.
3810
@end enumerate
3811
 
3812
The table is a @code{addr_vec} or @code{addr_diff_vec} inside of a
3813
@code{jump_insn}.  The number of elements in the table is one plus the
3814
difference between the upper bound and the lower bound.
3815
 
3816
@cindex @code{tablejump} instruction pattern
3817
@item @samp{tablejump}
3818
Instruction to jump to a variable address.  This is a low-level
3819
capability which can be used to implement a dispatch table when there
3820
is no @samp{casesi} pattern.
3821
 
3822
This pattern requires two operands: the address or offset, and a label
3823
which should immediately precede the jump table.  If the macro
3824
@code{CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE} evaluates to a nonzero value then the first
3825
operand is an offset which counts from the address of the table; otherwise,
3826
it is an absolute address to jump to.  In either case, the first operand has
3827
mode @code{Pmode}.
3828
 
3829
The @samp{tablejump} insn is always the last insn before the jump
3830
table it uses.  Its assembler code normally has no need to use the
3831
second operand, but you should incorporate it in the RTL pattern so
3832
that the jump optimizer will not delete the table as unreachable code.
3833
 
3834
 
3835
@cindex @code{decrement_and_branch_until_zero} instruction pattern
3836
@item @samp{decrement_and_branch_until_zero}
3837
Conditional branch instruction that decrements a register and
3838
jumps if the register is nonzero.  Operand 0 is the register to
3839
decrement and test; operand 1 is the label to jump to if the
3840
register is nonzero.  @xref{Looping Patterns}.
3841
 
3842
This optional instruction pattern is only used by the combiner,
3843
typically for loops reversed by the loop optimizer when strength
3844
reduction is enabled.
3845
 
3846
@cindex @code{doloop_end} instruction pattern
3847
@item @samp{doloop_end}
3848
Conditional branch instruction that decrements a register and jumps if
3849
the register is nonzero.  This instruction takes five operands: Operand
3850
 
3851
iterations as a @code{const_int} or @code{const0_rtx} if this cannot be
3852
determined until run-time; operand 2 is the actual or estimated maximum
3853
number of iterations as a @code{const_int}; operand 3 is the number of
3854
enclosed loops as a @code{const_int} (an innermost loop has a value of
3855
1); operand 4 is the label to jump to if the register is nonzero.
3856
@xref{Looping Patterns}.
3857
 
3858
This optional instruction pattern should be defined for machines with
3859
low-overhead looping instructions as the loop optimizer will try to
3860
modify suitable loops to utilize it.  If nested low-overhead looping is
3861
not supported, use a @code{define_expand} (@pxref{Expander Definitions})
3862
and make the pattern fail if operand 3 is not @code{const1_rtx}.
3863
Similarly, if the actual or estimated maximum number of iterations is
3864
too large for this instruction, make it fail.
3865
 
3866
@cindex @code{doloop_begin} instruction pattern
3867
@item @samp{doloop_begin}
3868
Companion instruction to @code{doloop_end} required for machines that
3869
need to perform some initialization, such as loading special registers
3870
used by a low-overhead looping instruction.  If initialization insns do
3871
not always need to be emitted, use a @code{define_expand}
3872
(@pxref{Expander Definitions}) and make it fail.
3873
 
3874
 
3875
@cindex @code{canonicalize_funcptr_for_compare} instruction pattern
3876
@item @samp{canonicalize_funcptr_for_compare}
3877
Canonicalize the function pointer in operand 1 and store the result
3878
into operand 0.
3879
 
3880
Operand 0 is always a @code{reg} and has mode @code{Pmode}; operand 1
3881
may be a @code{reg}, @code{mem}, @code{symbol_ref}, @code{const_int}, etc
3882
and also has mode @code{Pmode}.
3883
 
3884
Canonicalization of a function pointer usually involves computing
3885
the address of the function which would be called if the function
3886
pointer were used in an indirect call.
3887
 
3888
Only define this pattern if function pointers on the target machine
3889
can have different values but still call the same function when
3890
used in an indirect call.
3891
 
3892
@cindex @code{save_stack_block} instruction pattern
3893
@cindex @code{save_stack_function} instruction pattern
3894
@cindex @code{save_stack_nonlocal} instruction pattern
3895
@cindex @code{restore_stack_block} instruction pattern
3896
@cindex @code{restore_stack_function} instruction pattern
3897
@cindex @code{restore_stack_nonlocal} instruction pattern
3898
@item @samp{save_stack_block}
3899
@itemx @samp{save_stack_function}
3900
@itemx @samp{save_stack_nonlocal}
3901
@itemx @samp{restore_stack_block}
3902
@itemx @samp{restore_stack_function}
3903
@itemx @samp{restore_stack_nonlocal}
3904
Most machines save and restore the stack pointer by copying it to or
3905
from an object of mode @code{Pmode}.  Do not define these patterns on
3906
such machines.
3907
 
3908
Some machines require special handling for stack pointer saves and
3909
restores.  On those machines, define the patterns corresponding to the
3910
non-standard cases by using a @code{define_expand} (@pxref{Expander
3911
Definitions}) that produces the required insns.  The three types of
3912
saves and restores are:
3913
 
3914
@enumerate
3915
@item
3916
@samp{save_stack_block} saves the stack pointer at the start of a block
3917
that allocates a variable-sized object, and @samp{restore_stack_block}
3918
restores the stack pointer when the block is exited.
3919
 
3920
@item
3921
@samp{save_stack_function} and @samp{restore_stack_function} do a
3922
similar job for the outermost block of a function and are used when the
3923
function allocates variable-sized objects or calls @code{alloca}.  Only
3924
the epilogue uses the restored stack pointer, allowing a simpler save or
3925
restore sequence on some machines.
3926
 
3927
@item
3928
@samp{save_stack_nonlocal} is used in functions that contain labels
3929
branched to by nested functions.  It saves the stack pointer in such a
3930
way that the inner function can use @samp{restore_stack_nonlocal} to
3931
restore the stack pointer.  The compiler generates code to restore the
3932
frame and argument pointer registers, but some machines require saving
3933
and restoring additional data such as register window information or
3934
stack backchains.  Place insns in these patterns to save and restore any
3935
such required data.
3936
@end enumerate
3937
 
3938
When saving the stack pointer, operand 0 is the save area and operand 1
3939
is the stack pointer.  The mode used to allocate the save area defaults
3940
to @code{Pmode} but you can override that choice by defining the
3941
@code{STACK_SAVEAREA_MODE} macro (@pxref{Storage Layout}).  You must
3942
specify an integral mode, or @code{VOIDmode} if no save area is needed
3943
for a particular type of save (either because no save is needed or
3944
because a machine-specific save area can be used).  Operand 0 is the
3945
stack pointer and operand 1 is the save area for restore operations.  If
3946
@samp{save_stack_block} is defined, operand 0 must not be
3947
@code{VOIDmode} since these saves can be arbitrarily nested.
3948
 
3949
A save area is a @code{mem} that is at a constant offset from
3950
@code{virtual_stack_vars_rtx} when the stack pointer is saved for use by
3951
nonlocal gotos and a @code{reg} in the other two cases.
3952
 
3953
@cindex @code{allocate_stack} instruction pattern
3954
@item @samp{allocate_stack}
3955
Subtract (or add if @code{STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD} is undefined) operand 1 from
3956
the stack pointer to create space for dynamically allocated data.
3957
 
3958
Store the resultant pointer to this space into operand 0.  If you
3959
are allocating space from the main stack, do this by emitting a
3960
move insn to copy @code{virtual_stack_dynamic_rtx} to operand 0.
3961
If you are allocating the space elsewhere, generate code to copy the
3962
location of the space to operand 0.  In the latter case, you must
3963
ensure this space gets freed when the corresponding space on the main
3964
stack is free.
3965
 
3966
Do not define this pattern if all that must be done is the subtraction.
3967
Some machines require other operations such as stack probes or
3968
maintaining the back chain.  Define this pattern to emit those
3969
operations in addition to updating the stack pointer.
3970
 
3971
@cindex @code{check_stack} instruction pattern
3972
@item @samp{check_stack}
3973
If stack checking cannot be done on your system by probing the stack with
3974
a load or store instruction (@pxref{Stack Checking}), define this pattern
3975
to perform the needed check and signaling an error if the stack
3976
has overflowed.  The single operand is the location in the stack furthest
3977
from the current stack pointer that you need to validate.  Normally,
3978
on machines where this pattern is needed, you would obtain the stack
3979
limit from a global or thread-specific variable or register.
3980
 
3981
@cindex @code{nonlocal_goto} instruction pattern
3982
@item @samp{nonlocal_goto}
3983
Emit code to generate a non-local goto, e.g., a jump from one function
3984
to a label in an outer function.  This pattern has four arguments,
3985
each representing a value to be used in the jump.  The first
3986
argument is to be loaded into the frame pointer, the second is
3987
the address to branch to (code to dispatch to the actual label),
3988
the third is the address of a location where the stack is saved,
3989
and the last is the address of the label, to be placed in the
3990
location for the incoming static chain.
3991
 
3992
On most machines you need not define this pattern, since GCC will
3993
already generate the correct code, which is to load the frame pointer
3994
and static chain, restore the stack (using the
3995
@samp{restore_stack_nonlocal} pattern, if defined), and jump indirectly
3996
to the dispatcher.  You need only define this pattern if this code will
3997
not work on your machine.
3998
 
3999
@cindex @code{nonlocal_goto_receiver} instruction pattern
4000
@item @samp{nonlocal_goto_receiver}
4001
This pattern, if defined, contains code needed at the target of a
4002
nonlocal goto after the code already generated by GCC@.  You will not
4003
normally need to define this pattern.  A typical reason why you might
4004
need this pattern is if some value, such as a pointer to a global table,
4005
must be restored when the frame pointer is restored.  Note that a nonlocal
4006
goto only occurs within a unit-of-translation, so a global table pointer
4007
that is shared by all functions of a given module need not be restored.
4008
There are no arguments.
4009
 
4010
@cindex @code{exception_receiver} instruction pattern
4011
@item @samp{exception_receiver}
4012
This pattern, if defined, contains code needed at the site of an
4013
exception handler that isn't needed at the site of a nonlocal goto.  You
4014
will not normally need to define this pattern.  A typical reason why you
4015
might need this pattern is if some value, such as a pointer to a global
4016
table, must be restored after control flow is branched to the handler of
4017
an exception.  There are no arguments.
4018
 
4019
@cindex @code{builtin_setjmp_setup} instruction pattern
4020
@item @samp{builtin_setjmp_setup}
4021
This pattern, if defined, contains additional code needed to initialize
4022
the @code{jmp_buf}.  You will not normally need to define this pattern.
4023
A typical reason why you might need this pattern is if some value, such
4024
as a pointer to a global table, must be restored.  Though it is
4025
preferred that the pointer value be recalculated if possible (given the
4026
address of a label for instance).  The single argument is a pointer to
4027
the @code{jmp_buf}.  Note that the buffer is five words long and that
4028
the first three are normally used by the generic mechanism.
4029
 
4030
@cindex @code{builtin_setjmp_receiver} instruction pattern
4031
@item @samp{builtin_setjmp_receiver}
4032
This pattern, if defined, contains code needed at the site of an
4033
built-in setjmp that isn't needed at the site of a nonlocal goto.  You
4034
will not normally need to define this pattern.  A typical reason why you
4035
might need this pattern is if some value, such as a pointer to a global
4036
table, must be restored.  It takes one argument, which is the label
4037
to which builtin_longjmp transfered control; this pattern may be emitted
4038
at a small offset from that label.
4039
 
4040
@cindex @code{builtin_longjmp} instruction pattern
4041
@item @samp{builtin_longjmp}
4042
This pattern, if defined, performs the entire action of the longjmp.
4043
You will not normally need to define this pattern unless you also define
4044
@code{builtin_setjmp_setup}.  The single argument is a pointer to the
4045
@code{jmp_buf}.
4046
 
4047
@cindex @code{eh_return} instruction pattern
4048
@item @samp{eh_return}
4049
This pattern, if defined, affects the way @code{__builtin_eh_return},
4050
and thence the call frame exception handling library routines, are
4051
built.  It is intended to handle non-trivial actions needed along
4052
the abnormal return path.
4053
 
4054
The address of the exception handler to which the function should return
4055
is passed as operand to this pattern.  It will normally need to copied by
4056
the pattern to some special register or memory location.
4057
If the pattern needs to determine the location of the target call
4058
frame in order to do so, it may use @code{EH_RETURN_STACKADJ_RTX},
4059
if defined; it will have already been assigned.
4060
 
4061
If this pattern is not defined, the default action will be to simply
4062
copy the return address to @code{EH_RETURN_HANDLER_RTX}.  Either
4063
that macro or this pattern needs to be defined if call frame exception
4064
handling is to be used.
4065
 
4066
@cindex @code{prologue} instruction pattern
4067
@anchor{prologue instruction pattern}
4068
@item @samp{prologue}
4069
This pattern, if defined, emits RTL for entry to a function.  The function
4070
entry is responsible for setting up the stack frame, initializing the frame
4071
pointer register, saving callee saved registers, etc.
4072
 
4073
Using a prologue pattern is generally preferred over defining
4074
@code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} to emit assembly code for the prologue.
4075
 
4076
The @code{prologue} pattern is particularly useful for targets which perform
4077
instruction scheduling.
4078
 
4079
@cindex @code{epilogue} instruction pattern
4080
@anchor{epilogue instruction pattern}
4081
@item @samp{epilogue}
4082
This pattern emits RTL for exit from a function.  The function
4083
exit is responsible for deallocating the stack frame, restoring callee saved
4084
registers and emitting the return instruction.
4085
 
4086
Using an epilogue pattern is generally preferred over defining
4087
@code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} to emit assembly code for the epilogue.
4088
 
4089
The @code{epilogue} pattern is particularly useful for targets which perform
4090
instruction scheduling or which have delay slots for their return instruction.
4091
 
4092
@cindex @code{sibcall_epilogue} instruction pattern
4093
@item @samp{sibcall_epilogue}
4094
This pattern, if defined, emits RTL for exit from a function without the final
4095
branch back to the calling function.  This pattern will be emitted before any
4096
sibling call (aka tail call) sites.
4097
 
4098
The @code{sibcall_epilogue} pattern must not clobber any arguments used for
4099
parameter passing or any stack slots for arguments passed to the current
4100
function.
4101
 
4102
@cindex @code{trap} instruction pattern
4103
@item @samp{trap}
4104
This pattern, if defined, signals an error, typically by causing some
4105
kind of signal to be raised.  Among other places, it is used by the Java
4106
front end to signal `invalid array index' exceptions.
4107
 
4108
@cindex @code{conditional_trap} instruction pattern
4109
@item @samp{conditional_trap}
4110
Conditional trap instruction.  Operand 0 is a piece of RTL which
4111
performs a comparison.  Operand 1 is the trap code, an integer.
4112
 
4113
A typical @code{conditional_trap} pattern looks like
4114
 
4115
@smallexample
4116
(define_insn "conditional_trap"
4117
  [(trap_if (match_operator 0 "trap_operator"
4118
             [(cc0) (const_int 0)])
4119
            (match_operand 1 "const_int_operand" "i"))]
4120
  ""
4121
  "@dots{}")
4122
@end smallexample
4123
 
4124
@cindex @code{prefetch} instruction pattern
4125
@item @samp{prefetch}
4126
 
4127
This pattern, if defined, emits code for a non-faulting data prefetch
4128
instruction.  Operand 0 is the address of the memory to prefetch.  Operand 1
4129
is a constant 1 if the prefetch is preparing for a write to the memory
4130
address, or a constant 0 otherwise.  Operand 2 is the expected degree of
4131
temporal locality of the data and is a value between 0 and 3, inclusive; 0
4132
means that the data has no temporal locality, so it need not be left in the
4133
cache after the access; 3 means that the data has a high degree of temporal
4134
locality and should be left in all levels of cache possible;  1 and 2 mean,
4135
respectively, a low or moderate degree of temporal locality.
4136
 
4137
Targets that do not support write prefetches or locality hints can ignore
4138
the values of operands 1 and 2.
4139
 
4140
@cindex @code{memory_barrier} instruction pattern
4141
@item @samp{memory_barrier}
4142
 
4143
If the target memory model is not fully synchronous, then this pattern
4144
should be defined to an instruction that orders both loads and stores
4145
before the instruction with respect to loads and stores after the instruction.
4146
This pattern has no operands.
4147
 
4148
@cindex @code{sync_compare_and_swap@var{mode}} instruction pattern
4149
@item @samp{sync_compare_and_swap@var{mode}}
4150
 
4151
This pattern, if defined, emits code for an atomic compare-and-swap
4152
operation.  Operand 1 is the memory on which the atomic operation is
4153
performed.  Operand 2 is the ``old'' value to be compared against the
4154
current contents of the memory location.  Operand 3 is the ``new'' value
4155
to store in the memory if the compare succeeds.  Operand 0 is the result
4156
of the operation; it should contain the contents of the memory
4157
before the operation.  If the compare succeeds, this should obviously be
4158
a copy of operand 2.
4159
 
4160
This pattern must show that both operand 0 and operand 1 are modified.
4161
 
4162
This pattern must issue any memory barrier instructions such that all
4163
memory operations before the atomic operation occur before the atomic
4164
operation and all memory operations after the atomic operation occur
4165
after the atomic operation.
4166
 
4167
@cindex @code{sync_compare_and_swap_cc@var{mode}} instruction pattern
4168
@item @samp{sync_compare_and_swap_cc@var{mode}}
4169
 
4170
This pattern is just like @code{sync_compare_and_swap@var{mode}}, except
4171
it should act as if compare part of the compare-and-swap were issued via
4172
@code{cmp@var{m}}.  This comparison will only be used with @code{EQ} and
4173
@code{NE} branches and @code{setcc} operations.
4174
 
4175
Some targets do expose the success or failure of the compare-and-swap
4176
operation via the status flags.  Ideally we wouldn't need a separate
4177
named pattern in order to take advantage of this, but the combine pass
4178
does not handle patterns with multiple sets, which is required by
4179
definition for @code{sync_compare_and_swap@var{mode}}.
4180
 
4181
@cindex @code{sync_add@var{mode}} instruction pattern
4182
@cindex @code{sync_sub@var{mode}} instruction pattern
4183
@cindex @code{sync_ior@var{mode}} instruction pattern
4184
@cindex @code{sync_and@var{mode}} instruction pattern
4185
@cindex @code{sync_xor@var{mode}} instruction pattern
4186
@cindex @code{sync_nand@var{mode}} instruction pattern
4187
@item @samp{sync_add@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_sub@var{mode}}
4188
@itemx @samp{sync_ior@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_and@var{mode}}
4189
@itemx @samp{sync_xor@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_nand@var{mode}}
4190
 
4191
These patterns emit code for an atomic operation on memory.
4192
Operand 0 is the memory on which the atomic operation is performed.
4193
Operand 1 is the second operand to the binary operator.
4194
 
4195
The ``nand'' operation is @code{~op0 & op1}.
4196
 
4197
This pattern must issue any memory barrier instructions such that all
4198
memory operations before the atomic operation occur before the atomic
4199
operation and all memory operations after the atomic operation occur
4200
after the atomic operation.
4201
 
4202
If these patterns are not defined, the operation will be constructed
4203
from a compare-and-swap operation, if defined.
4204
 
4205
@cindex @code{sync_old_add@var{mode}} instruction pattern
4206
@cindex @code{sync_old_sub@var{mode}} instruction pattern
4207
@cindex @code{sync_old_ior@var{mode}} instruction pattern
4208
@cindex @code{sync_old_and@var{mode}} instruction pattern
4209
@cindex @code{sync_old_xor@var{mode}} instruction pattern
4210
@cindex @code{sync_old_nand@var{mode}} instruction pattern
4211
@item @samp{sync_old_add@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_old_sub@var{mode}}
4212
@itemx @samp{sync_old_ior@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_old_and@var{mode}}
4213
@itemx @samp{sync_old_xor@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_old_nand@var{mode}}
4214
 
4215
These patterns are emit code for an atomic operation on memory,
4216
and return the value that the memory contained before the operation.
4217
Operand 0 is the result value, operand 1 is the memory on which the
4218
atomic operation is performed, and operand 2 is the second operand
4219
to the binary operator.
4220
 
4221
This pattern must issue any memory barrier instructions such that all
4222
memory operations before the atomic operation occur before the atomic
4223
operation and all memory operations after the atomic operation occur
4224
after the atomic operation.
4225
 
4226
If these patterns are not defined, the operation will be constructed
4227
from a compare-and-swap operation, if defined.
4228
 
4229
@cindex @code{sync_new_add@var{mode}} instruction pattern
4230
@cindex @code{sync_new_sub@var{mode}} instruction pattern
4231
@cindex @code{sync_new_ior@var{mode}} instruction pattern
4232
@cindex @code{sync_new_and@var{mode}} instruction pattern
4233
@cindex @code{sync_new_xor@var{mode}} instruction pattern
4234
@cindex @code{sync_new_nand@var{mode}} instruction pattern
4235
@item @samp{sync_new_add@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_new_sub@var{mode}}
4236
@itemx @samp{sync_new_ior@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_new_and@var{mode}}
4237
@itemx @samp{sync_new_xor@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_new_nand@var{mode}}
4238
 
4239
These patterns are like their @code{sync_old_@var{op}} counterparts,
4240
except that they return the value that exists in the memory location
4241
after the operation, rather than before the operation.
4242
 
4243
@cindex @code{sync_lock_test_and_set@var{mode}} instruction pattern
4244
@item @samp{sync_lock_test_and_set@var{mode}}
4245
 
4246
This pattern takes two forms, based on the capabilities of the target.
4247
In either case, operand 0 is the result of the operand, operand 1 is
4248
the memory on which the atomic operation is performed, and operand 2
4249
is the value to set in the lock.
4250
 
4251
In the ideal case, this operation is an atomic exchange operation, in
4252
which the previous value in memory operand is copied into the result
4253
operand, and the value operand is stored in the memory operand.
4254
 
4255
For less capable targets, any value operand that is not the constant 1
4256
should be rejected with @code{FAIL}.  In this case the target may use
4257
an atomic test-and-set bit operation.  The result operand should contain
4258
1 if the bit was previously set and 0 if the bit was previously clear.
4259
The true contents of the memory operand are implementation defined.
4260
 
4261
This pattern must issue any memory barrier instructions such that the
4262
pattern as a whole acts as an acquire barrier, that is all memory
4263
operations after the pattern do not occur until the lock is acquired.
4264
 
4265
If this pattern is not defined, the operation will be constructed from
4266
a compare-and-swap operation, if defined.
4267
 
4268
@cindex @code{sync_lock_release@var{mode}} instruction pattern
4269
@item @samp{sync_lock_release@var{mode}}
4270
 
4271
This pattern, if defined, releases a lock set by
4272
@code{sync_lock_test_and_set@var{mode}}.  Operand 0 is the memory
4273
that contains the lock; operand 1 is the value to store in the lock.
4274
 
4275
If the target doesn't implement full semantics for
4276
@code{sync_lock_test_and_set@var{mode}}, any value operand which is not
4277
the constant 0 should be rejected with @code{FAIL}, and the true contents
4278
of the memory operand are implementation defined.
4279
 
4280
This pattern must issue any memory barrier instructions such that the
4281
pattern as a whole acts as a release barrier, that is the lock is
4282
released only after all previous memory operations have completed.
4283
 
4284
If this pattern is not defined, then a @code{memory_barrier} pattern
4285
will be emitted, followed by a store of the value to the memory operand.
4286
 
4287
@cindex @code{stack_protect_set} instruction pattern
4288
@item @samp{stack_protect_set}
4289
 
4290
This pattern, if defined, moves a @code{Pmode} value from the memory
4291
in operand 1 to the memory in operand 0 without leaving the value in
4292
a register afterward.  This is to avoid leaking the value some place
4293
that an attacker might use to rewrite the stack guard slot after
4294
having clobbered it.
4295
 
4296
If this pattern is not defined, then a plain move pattern is generated.
4297
 
4298
@cindex @code{stack_protect_test} instruction pattern
4299
@item @samp{stack_protect_test}
4300
 
4301
This pattern, if defined, compares a @code{Pmode} value from the
4302
memory in operand 1 with the memory in operand 0 without leaving the
4303
value in a register afterward and branches to operand 2 if the values
4304
weren't equal.
4305
 
4306
If this pattern is not defined, then a plain compare pattern and
4307
conditional branch pattern is used.
4308
 
4309
@end table
4310
 
4311
@end ifset
4312
@c Each of the following nodes are wrapped in separate
4313
@c "@ifset INTERNALS" to work around memory limits for the default
4314
@c configuration in older tetex distributions.  Known to not work:
4315
@c tetex-1.0.7, known to work: tetex-2.0.2.
4316
@ifset INTERNALS
4317
@node Pattern Ordering
4318
@section When the Order of Patterns Matters
4319
@cindex Pattern Ordering
4320
@cindex Ordering of Patterns
4321
 
4322
Sometimes an insn can match more than one instruction pattern.  Then the
4323
pattern that appears first in the machine description is the one used.
4324
Therefore, more specific patterns (patterns that will match fewer things)
4325
and faster instructions (those that will produce better code when they
4326
do match) should usually go first in the description.
4327
 
4328
In some cases the effect of ordering the patterns can be used to hide
4329
a pattern when it is not valid.  For example, the 68000 has an
4330
instruction for converting a fullword to floating point and another
4331
for converting a byte to floating point.  An instruction converting
4332
an integer to floating point could match either one.  We put the
4333
pattern to convert the fullword first to make sure that one will
4334
be used rather than the other.  (Otherwise a large integer might
4335
be generated as a single-byte immediate quantity, which would not work.)
4336
Instead of using this pattern ordering it would be possible to make the
4337
pattern for convert-a-byte smart enough to deal properly with any
4338
constant value.
4339
 
4340
@end ifset
4341
@ifset INTERNALS
4342
@node Dependent Patterns
4343
@section Interdependence of Patterns
4344
@cindex Dependent Patterns
4345
@cindex Interdependence of Patterns
4346
 
4347
Every machine description must have a named pattern for each of the
4348
conditional branch names @samp{b@var{cond}}.  The recognition template
4349
must always have the form
4350
 
4351
@smallexample
4352
(set (pc)
4353
     (if_then_else (@var{cond} (cc0) (const_int 0))
4354
                   (label_ref (match_operand 0 "" ""))
4355
                   (pc)))
4356
@end smallexample
4357
 
4358
@noindent
4359
In addition, every machine description must have an anonymous pattern
4360
for each of the possible reverse-conditional branches.  Their templates
4361
look like
4362
 
4363
@smallexample
4364
(set (pc)
4365
     (if_then_else (@var{cond} (cc0) (const_int 0))
4366
                   (pc)
4367
                   (label_ref (match_operand 0 "" ""))))
4368
@end smallexample
4369
 
4370
@noindent
4371
They are necessary because jump optimization can turn direct-conditional
4372
branches into reverse-conditional branches.
4373
 
4374
It is often convenient to use the @code{match_operator} construct to
4375
reduce the number of patterns that must be specified for branches.  For
4376
example,
4377
 
4378
@smallexample
4379
(define_insn ""
4380
  [(set (pc)
4381
        (if_then_else (match_operator 0 "comparison_operator"
4382
                                      [(cc0) (const_int 0)])
4383
                      (pc)
4384
                      (label_ref (match_operand 1 "" ""))))]
4385
  "@var{condition}"
4386
  "@dots{}")
4387
@end smallexample
4388
 
4389
In some cases machines support instructions identical except for the
4390
machine mode of one or more operands.  For example, there may be
4391
``sign-extend halfword'' and ``sign-extend byte'' instructions whose
4392
patterns are
4393
 
4394
@smallexample
4395
(set (match_operand:SI 0 @dots{})
4396
     (extend:SI (match_operand:HI 1 @dots{})))
4397
 
4398
(set (match_operand:SI 0 @dots{})
4399
     (extend:SI (match_operand:QI 1 @dots{})))
4400
@end smallexample
4401
 
4402
@noindent
4403
Constant integers do not specify a machine mode, so an instruction to
4404
extend a constant value could match either pattern.  The pattern it
4405
actually will match is the one that appears first in the file.  For correct
4406
results, this must be the one for the widest possible mode (@code{HImode},
4407
here).  If the pattern matches the @code{QImode} instruction, the results
4408
will be incorrect if the constant value does not actually fit that mode.
4409
 
4410
Such instructions to extend constants are rarely generated because they are
4411
optimized away, but they do occasionally happen in nonoptimized
4412
compilations.
4413
 
4414
If a constraint in a pattern allows a constant, the reload pass may
4415
replace a register with a constant permitted by the constraint in some
4416
cases.  Similarly for memory references.  Because of this substitution,
4417
you should not provide separate patterns for increment and decrement
4418
instructions.  Instead, they should be generated from the same pattern
4419
that supports register-register add insns by examining the operands and
4420
generating the appropriate machine instruction.
4421
 
4422
@end ifset
4423
@ifset INTERNALS
4424
@node Jump Patterns
4425
@section Defining Jump Instruction Patterns
4426
@cindex jump instruction patterns
4427
@cindex defining jump instruction patterns
4428
 
4429
For most machines, GCC assumes that the machine has a condition code.
4430
A comparison insn sets the condition code, recording the results of both
4431
signed and unsigned comparison of the given operands.  A separate branch
4432
insn tests the condition code and branches or not according its value.
4433
The branch insns come in distinct signed and unsigned flavors.  Many
4434
common machines, such as the VAX, the 68000 and the 32000, work this
4435
way.
4436
 
4437
Some machines have distinct signed and unsigned compare instructions, and
4438
only one set of conditional branch instructions.  The easiest way to handle
4439
these machines is to treat them just like the others until the final stage
4440
where assembly code is written.  At this time, when outputting code for the
4441
compare instruction, peek ahead at the following branch using
4442
@code{next_cc0_user (insn)}.  (The variable @code{insn} refers to the insn
4443
being output, in the output-writing code in an instruction pattern.)  If
4444
the RTL says that is an unsigned branch, output an unsigned compare;
4445
otherwise output a signed compare.  When the branch itself is output, you
4446
can treat signed and unsigned branches identically.
4447
 
4448
The reason you can do this is that GCC always generates a pair of
4449
consecutive RTL insns, possibly separated by @code{note} insns, one to
4450
set the condition code and one to test it, and keeps the pair inviolate
4451
until the end.
4452
 
4453
To go with this technique, you must define the machine-description macro
4454
@code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} to do @code{CC_STATUS_INIT}; in other words, no
4455
compare instruction is superfluous.
4456
 
4457
Some machines have compare-and-branch instructions and no condition code.
4458
A similar technique works for them.  When it is time to ``output'' a
4459
compare instruction, record its operands in two static variables.  When
4460
outputting the branch-on-condition-code instruction that follows, actually
4461
output a compare-and-branch instruction that uses the remembered operands.
4462
 
4463
It also works to define patterns for compare-and-branch instructions.
4464
In optimizing compilation, the pair of compare and branch instructions
4465
will be combined according to these patterns.  But this does not happen
4466
if optimization is not requested.  So you must use one of the solutions
4467
above in addition to any special patterns you define.
4468
 
4469
In many RISC machines, most instructions do not affect the condition
4470
code and there may not even be a separate condition code register.  On
4471
these machines, the restriction that the definition and use of the
4472
condition code be adjacent insns is not necessary and can prevent
4473
important optimizations.  For example, on the IBM RS/6000, there is a
4474
delay for taken branches unless the condition code register is set three
4475
instructions earlier than the conditional branch.  The instruction
4476
scheduler cannot perform this optimization if it is not permitted to
4477
separate the definition and use of the condition code register.
4478
 
4479
On these machines, do not use @code{(cc0)}, but instead use a register
4480
to represent the condition code.  If there is a specific condition code
4481
register in the machine, use a hard register.  If the condition code or
4482
comparison result can be placed in any general register, or if there are
4483
multiple condition registers, use a pseudo register.
4484
 
4485
@findex prev_cc0_setter
4486
@findex next_cc0_user
4487
On some machines, the type of branch instruction generated may depend on
4488
the way the condition code was produced; for example, on the 68k and
4489
SPARC, setting the condition code directly from an add or subtract
4490
instruction does not clear the overflow bit the way that a test
4491
instruction does, so a different branch instruction must be used for
4492
some conditional branches.  For machines that use @code{(cc0)}, the set
4493
and use of the condition code must be adjacent (separated only by
4494
@code{note} insns) allowing flags in @code{cc_status} to be used.
4495
(@xref{Condition Code}.)  Also, the comparison and branch insns can be
4496
located from each other by using the functions @code{prev_cc0_setter}
4497
and @code{next_cc0_user}.
4498
 
4499
However, this is not true on machines that do not use @code{(cc0)}.  On
4500
those machines, no assumptions can be made about the adjacency of the
4501
compare and branch insns and the above methods cannot be used.  Instead,
4502
we use the machine mode of the condition code register to record
4503
different formats of the condition code register.
4504
 
4505
Registers used to store the condition code value should have a mode that
4506
is in class @code{MODE_CC}.  Normally, it will be @code{CCmode}.  If
4507
additional modes are required (as for the add example mentioned above in
4508
the SPARC), define them in @file{@var{machine}-modes.def}
4509
(@pxref{Condition Code}).  Also define @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} to choose
4510
a mode given an operand of a compare.
4511
 
4512
If it is known during RTL generation that a different mode will be
4513
required (for example, if the machine has separate compare instructions
4514
for signed and unsigned quantities, like most IBM processors), they can
4515
be specified at that time.
4516
 
4517
If the cases that require different modes would be made by instruction
4518
combination, the macro @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} determines which machine
4519
mode should be used for the comparison result.  The patterns should be
4520
written using that mode.  To support the case of the add on the SPARC
4521
discussed above, we have the pattern
4522
 
4523
@smallexample
4524
(define_insn ""
4525
  [(set (reg:CC_NOOV 0)
4526
        (compare:CC_NOOV
4527
          (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "%r")
4528
                   (match_operand:SI 1 "arith_operand" "rI"))
4529
          (const_int 0)))]
4530
  ""
4531
  "@dots{}")
4532
@end smallexample
4533
 
4534
The @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} macro on the SPARC returns @code{CC_NOOVmode}
4535
for comparisons whose argument is a @code{plus}.
4536
 
4537
@end ifset
4538
@ifset INTERNALS
4539
@node Looping Patterns
4540
@section Defining Looping Instruction Patterns
4541
@cindex looping instruction patterns
4542
@cindex defining looping instruction patterns
4543
 
4544
Some machines have special jump instructions that can be utilized to
4545
make loops more efficient.  A common example is the 68000 @samp{dbra}
4546
instruction which performs a decrement of a register and a branch if the
4547
result was greater than zero.  Other machines, in particular digital
4548
signal processors (DSPs), have special block repeat instructions to
4549
provide low-overhead loop support.  For example, the TI TMS320C3x/C4x
4550
DSPs have a block repeat instruction that loads special registers to
4551
mark the top and end of a loop and to count the number of loop
4552
iterations.  This avoids the need for fetching and executing a
4553
@samp{dbra}-like instruction and avoids pipeline stalls associated with
4554
the jump.
4555
 
4556
GCC has three special named patterns to support low overhead looping.
4557
They are @samp{decrement_and_branch_until_zero}, @samp{doloop_begin},
4558
and @samp{doloop_end}.  The first pattern,
4559
@samp{decrement_and_branch_until_zero}, is not emitted during RTL
4560
generation but may be emitted during the instruction combination phase.
4561
This requires the assistance of the loop optimizer, using information
4562
collected during strength reduction, to reverse a loop to count down to
4563
zero.  Some targets also require the loop optimizer to add a
4564
@code{REG_NONNEG} note to indicate that the iteration count is always
4565
positive.  This is needed if the target performs a signed loop
4566
termination test.  For example, the 68000 uses a pattern similar to the
4567
following for its @code{dbra} instruction:
4568
 
4569
@smallexample
4570
@group
4571
(define_insn "decrement_and_branch_until_zero"
4572
  [(set (pc)
4573
        (if_then_else
4574
          (ge (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "+d*am")
4575
                       (const_int -1))
4576
              (const_int 0))
4577
          (label_ref (match_operand 1 "" ""))
4578
          (pc)))
4579
   (set (match_dup 0)
4580
        (plus:SI (match_dup 0)
4581
                 (const_int -1)))]
4582
  "find_reg_note (insn, REG_NONNEG, 0)"
4583
  "@dots{}")
4584
@end group
4585
@end smallexample
4586
 
4587
Note that since the insn is both a jump insn and has an output, it must
4588
deal with its own reloads, hence the `m' constraints.  Also note that
4589
since this insn is generated by the instruction combination phase
4590
combining two sequential insns together into an implicit parallel insn,
4591
the iteration counter needs to be biased by the same amount as the
4592
decrement operation, in this case @minus{}1.  Note that the following similar
4593
pattern will not be matched by the combiner.
4594
 
4595
@smallexample
4596
@group
4597
(define_insn "decrement_and_branch_until_zero"
4598
  [(set (pc)
4599
        (if_then_else
4600
          (ge (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "+d*am")
4601
              (const_int 1))
4602
          (label_ref (match_operand 1 "" ""))
4603
          (pc)))
4604
   (set (match_dup 0)
4605
        (plus:SI (match_dup 0)
4606
                 (const_int -1)))]
4607
  "find_reg_note (insn, REG_NONNEG, 0)"
4608
  "@dots{}")
4609
@end group
4610
@end smallexample
4611
 
4612
The other two special looping patterns, @samp{doloop_begin} and
4613
@samp{doloop_end}, are emitted by the loop optimizer for certain
4614
well-behaved loops with a finite number of loop iterations using
4615
information collected during strength reduction.
4616
 
4617
The @samp{doloop_end} pattern describes the actual looping instruction
4618
(or the implicit looping operation) and the @samp{doloop_begin} pattern
4619
is an optional companion pattern that can be used for initialization
4620
needed for some low-overhead looping instructions.
4621
 
4622
Note that some machines require the actual looping instruction to be
4623
emitted at the top of the loop (e.g., the TMS320C3x/C4x DSPs).  Emitting
4624
the true RTL for a looping instruction at the top of the loop can cause
4625
problems with flow analysis.  So instead, a dummy @code{doloop} insn is
4626
emitted at the end of the loop.  The machine dependent reorg pass checks
4627
for the presence of this @code{doloop} insn and then searches back to
4628
the top of the loop, where it inserts the true looping insn (provided
4629
there are no instructions in the loop which would cause problems).  Any
4630
additional labels can be emitted at this point.  In addition, if the
4631
desired special iteration counter register was not allocated, this
4632
machine dependent reorg pass could emit a traditional compare and jump
4633
instruction pair.
4634
 
4635
The essential difference between the
4636
@samp{decrement_and_branch_until_zero} and the @samp{doloop_end}
4637
patterns is that the loop optimizer allocates an additional pseudo
4638
register for the latter as an iteration counter.  This pseudo register
4639
cannot be used within the loop (i.e., general induction variables cannot
4640
be derived from it), however, in many cases the loop induction variable
4641
may become redundant and removed by the flow pass.
4642
 
4643
 
4644
@end ifset
4645
@ifset INTERNALS
4646
@node Insn Canonicalizations
4647
@section Canonicalization of Instructions
4648
@cindex canonicalization of instructions
4649
@cindex insn canonicalization
4650
 
4651
There are often cases where multiple RTL expressions could represent an
4652
operation performed by a single machine instruction.  This situation is
4653
most commonly encountered with logical, branch, and multiply-accumulate
4654
instructions.  In such cases, the compiler attempts to convert these
4655
multiple RTL expressions into a single canonical form to reduce the
4656
number of insn patterns required.
4657
 
4658
In addition to algebraic simplifications, following canonicalizations
4659
are performed:
4660
 
4661
@itemize @bullet
4662
@item
4663
For commutative and comparison operators, a constant is always made the
4664
second operand.  If a machine only supports a constant as the second
4665
operand, only patterns that match a constant in the second operand need
4666
be supplied.
4667
 
4668
@item
4669
For associative operators, a sequence of operators will always chain
4670
to the left; for instance, only the left operand of an integer @code{plus}
4671
can itself be a @code{plus}.  @code{and}, @code{ior}, @code{xor},
4672
@code{plus}, @code{mult}, @code{smin}, @code{smax}, @code{umin}, and
4673
@code{umax} are associative when applied to integers, and sometimes to
4674
floating-point.
4675
 
4676
@item
4677
@cindex @code{neg}, canonicalization of
4678
@cindex @code{not}, canonicalization of
4679
@cindex @code{mult}, canonicalization of
4680
@cindex @code{plus}, canonicalization of
4681
@cindex @code{minus}, canonicalization of
4682
For these operators, if only one operand is a @code{neg}, @code{not},
4683
@code{mult}, @code{plus}, or @code{minus} expression, it will be the
4684
first operand.
4685
 
4686
@item
4687
In combinations of @code{neg}, @code{mult}, @code{plus}, and
4688
@code{minus}, the @code{neg} operations (if any) will be moved inside
4689
the operations as far as possible.  For instance,
4690
@code{(neg (mult A B))} is canonicalized as @code{(mult (neg A) B)}, but
4691
@code{(plus (mult (neg A) B) C)} is canonicalized as
4692
@code{(minus A (mult B C))}.
4693
 
4694
@cindex @code{compare}, canonicalization of
4695
@item
4696
For the @code{compare} operator, a constant is always the second operand
4697
on machines where @code{cc0} is used (@pxref{Jump Patterns}).  On other
4698
machines, there are rare cases where the compiler might want to construct
4699
a @code{compare} with a constant as the first operand.  However, these
4700
cases are not common enough for it to be worthwhile to provide a pattern
4701
matching a constant as the first operand unless the machine actually has
4702
such an instruction.
4703
 
4704
An operand of @code{neg}, @code{not}, @code{mult}, @code{plus}, or
4705
@code{minus} is made the first operand under the same conditions as
4706
above.
4707
 
4708
@item
4709
@code{(minus @var{x} (const_int @var{n}))} is converted to
4710
@code{(plus @var{x} (const_int @var{-n}))}.
4711
 
4712
@item
4713
Within address computations (i.e., inside @code{mem}), a left shift is
4714
converted into the appropriate multiplication by a power of two.
4715
 
4716
@cindex @code{ior}, canonicalization of
4717
@cindex @code{and}, canonicalization of
4718
@cindex De Morgan's law
4719
@item
4720
De Morgan's Law is used to move bitwise negation inside a bitwise
4721
logical-and or logical-or operation.  If this results in only one
4722
operand being a @code{not} expression, it will be the first one.
4723
 
4724
A machine that has an instruction that performs a bitwise logical-and of one
4725
operand with the bitwise negation of the other should specify the pattern
4726
for that instruction as
4727
 
4728
@smallexample
4729
(define_insn ""
4730
  [(set (match_operand:@var{m} 0 @dots{})
4731
        (and:@var{m} (not:@var{m} (match_operand:@var{m} 1 @dots{}))
4732
                     (match_operand:@var{m} 2 @dots{})))]
4733
  "@dots{}"
4734
  "@dots{}")
4735
@end smallexample
4736
 
4737
@noindent
4738
Similarly, a pattern for a ``NAND'' instruction should be written
4739
 
4740
@smallexample
4741
(define_insn ""
4742
  [(set (match_operand:@var{m} 0 @dots{})
4743
        (ior:@var{m} (not:@var{m} (match_operand:@var{m} 1 @dots{}))
4744
                     (not:@var{m} (match_operand:@var{m} 2 @dots{}))))]
4745
  "@dots{}"
4746
  "@dots{}")
4747
@end smallexample
4748
 
4749
In both cases, it is not necessary to include patterns for the many
4750
logically equivalent RTL expressions.
4751
 
4752
@cindex @code{xor}, canonicalization of
4753
@item
4754
The only possible RTL expressions involving both bitwise exclusive-or
4755
and bitwise negation are @code{(xor:@var{m} @var{x} @var{y})}
4756
and @code{(not:@var{m} (xor:@var{m} @var{x} @var{y}))}.
4757
 
4758
@item
4759
The sum of three items, one of which is a constant, will only appear in
4760
the form
4761
 
4762
@smallexample
4763
(plus:@var{m} (plus:@var{m} @var{x} @var{y}) @var{constant})
4764
@end smallexample
4765
 
4766
@item
4767
On machines that do not use @code{cc0},
4768
@code{(compare @var{x} (const_int 0))} will be converted to
4769
@var{x}.
4770
 
4771
@cindex @code{zero_extract}, canonicalization of
4772
@cindex @code{sign_extract}, canonicalization of
4773
@item
4774
Equality comparisons of a group of bits (usually a single bit) with zero
4775
will be written using @code{zero_extract} rather than the equivalent
4776
@code{and} or @code{sign_extract} operations.
4777
 
4778
@end itemize
4779
 
4780
@end ifset
4781
@ifset INTERNALS
4782
@node Expander Definitions
4783
@section Defining RTL Sequences for Code Generation
4784
@cindex expander definitions
4785
@cindex code generation RTL sequences
4786
@cindex defining RTL sequences for code generation
4787
 
4788
On some target machines, some standard pattern names for RTL generation
4789
cannot be handled with single insn, but a sequence of RTL insns can
4790
represent them.  For these target machines, you can write a
4791
@code{define_expand} to specify how to generate the sequence of RTL@.
4792
 
4793
@findex define_expand
4794
A @code{define_expand} is an RTL expression that looks almost like a
4795
@code{define_insn}; but, unlike the latter, a @code{define_expand} is used
4796
only for RTL generation and it can produce more than one RTL insn.
4797
 
4798
A @code{define_expand} RTX has four operands:
4799
 
4800
@itemize @bullet
4801
@item
4802
The name.  Each @code{define_expand} must have a name, since the only
4803
use for it is to refer to it by name.
4804
 
4805
@item
4806
The RTL template.  This is a vector of RTL expressions representing
4807
a sequence of separate instructions.  Unlike @code{define_insn}, there
4808
is no implicit surrounding @code{PARALLEL}.
4809
 
4810
@item
4811
The condition, a string containing a C expression.  This expression is
4812
used to express how the availability of this pattern depends on
4813
subclasses of target machine, selected by command-line options when GCC
4814
is run.  This is just like the condition of a @code{define_insn} that
4815
has a standard name.  Therefore, the condition (if present) may not
4816
depend on the data in the insn being matched, but only the
4817
target-machine-type flags.  The compiler needs to test these conditions
4818
during initialization in order to learn exactly which named instructions
4819
are available in a particular run.
4820
 
4821
@item
4822
The preparation statements, a string containing zero or more C
4823
statements which are to be executed before RTL code is generated from
4824
the RTL template.
4825
 
4826
Usually these statements prepare temporary registers for use as
4827
internal operands in the RTL template, but they can also generate RTL
4828
insns directly by calling routines such as @code{emit_insn}, etc.
4829
Any such insns precede the ones that come from the RTL template.
4830
@end itemize
4831
 
4832
Every RTL insn emitted by a @code{define_expand} must match some
4833
@code{define_insn} in the machine description.  Otherwise, the compiler
4834
will crash when trying to generate code for the insn or trying to optimize
4835
it.
4836
 
4837
The RTL template, in addition to controlling generation of RTL insns,
4838
also describes the operands that need to be specified when this pattern
4839
is used.  In particular, it gives a predicate for each operand.
4840
 
4841
A true operand, which needs to be specified in order to generate RTL from
4842
the pattern, should be described with a @code{match_operand} in its first
4843
occurrence in the RTL template.  This enters information on the operand's
4844
predicate into the tables that record such things.  GCC uses the
4845
information to preload the operand into a register if that is required for
4846
valid RTL code.  If the operand is referred to more than once, subsequent
4847
references should use @code{match_dup}.
4848
 
4849
The RTL template may also refer to internal ``operands'' which are
4850
temporary registers or labels used only within the sequence made by the
4851
@code{define_expand}.  Internal operands are substituted into the RTL
4852
template with @code{match_dup}, never with @code{match_operand}.  The
4853
values of the internal operands are not passed in as arguments by the
4854
compiler when it requests use of this pattern.  Instead, they are computed
4855
within the pattern, in the preparation statements.  These statements
4856
compute the values and store them into the appropriate elements of
4857
@code{operands} so that @code{match_dup} can find them.
4858
 
4859
There are two special macros defined for use in the preparation statements:
4860
@code{DONE} and @code{FAIL}.  Use them with a following semicolon,
4861
as a statement.
4862
 
4863
@table @code
4864
 
4865
@findex DONE
4866
@item DONE
4867
Use the @code{DONE} macro to end RTL generation for the pattern.  The
4868
only RTL insns resulting from the pattern on this occasion will be
4869
those already emitted by explicit calls to @code{emit_insn} within the
4870
preparation statements; the RTL template will not be generated.
4871
 
4872
@findex FAIL
4873
@item FAIL
4874
Make the pattern fail on this occasion.  When a pattern fails, it means
4875
that the pattern was not truly available.  The calling routines in the
4876
compiler will try other strategies for code generation using other patterns.
4877
 
4878
Failure is currently supported only for binary (addition, multiplication,
4879
shifting, etc.) and bit-field (@code{extv}, @code{extzv}, and @code{insv})
4880
operations.
4881
@end table
4882
 
4883
If the preparation falls through (invokes neither @code{DONE} nor
4884
@code{FAIL}), then the @code{define_expand} acts like a
4885
@code{define_insn} in that the RTL template is used to generate the
4886
insn.
4887
 
4888
The RTL template is not used for matching, only for generating the
4889
initial insn list.  If the preparation statement always invokes
4890
@code{DONE} or @code{FAIL}, the RTL template may be reduced to a simple
4891
list of operands, such as this example:
4892
 
4893
@smallexample
4894
@group
4895
(define_expand "addsi3"
4896
  [(match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "")
4897
   (match_operand:SI 1 "register_operand" "")
4898
   (match_operand:SI 2 "register_operand" "")]
4899
@end group
4900
@group
4901
  ""
4902
  "
4903
@{
4904
  handle_add (operands[0], operands[1], operands[2]);
4905
  DONE;
4906
@}")
4907
@end group
4908
@end smallexample
4909
 
4910
Here is an example, the definition of left-shift for the SPUR chip:
4911
 
4912
@smallexample
4913
@group
4914
(define_expand "ashlsi3"
4915
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "")
4916
        (ashift:SI
4917
@end group
4918
@group
4919
          (match_operand:SI 1 "register_operand" "")
4920
          (match_operand:SI 2 "nonmemory_operand" "")))]
4921
  ""
4922
  "
4923
@end group
4924
@end smallexample
4925
 
4926
@smallexample
4927
@group
4928
@{
4929
  if (GET_CODE (operands[2]) != CONST_INT
4930
      || (unsigned) INTVAL (operands[2]) > 3)
4931
    FAIL;
4932
@}")
4933
@end group
4934
@end smallexample
4935
 
4936
@noindent
4937
This example uses @code{define_expand} so that it can generate an RTL insn
4938
for shifting when the shift-count is in the supported range of 0 to 3 but
4939
fail in other cases where machine insns aren't available.  When it fails,
4940
the compiler tries another strategy using different patterns (such as, a
4941
library call).
4942
 
4943
If the compiler were able to handle nontrivial condition-strings in
4944
patterns with names, then it would be possible to use a
4945
@code{define_insn} in that case.  Here is another case (zero-extension
4946
on the 68000) which makes more use of the power of @code{define_expand}:
4947
 
4948
@smallexample
4949
(define_expand "zero_extendhisi2"
4950
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "")
4951
        (const_int 0))
4952
   (set (strict_low_part
4953
          (subreg:HI
4954
            (match_dup 0)
4955
            0))
4956
        (match_operand:HI 1 "general_operand" ""))]
4957
  ""
4958
  "operands[1] = make_safe_from (operands[1], operands[0]);")
4959
@end smallexample
4960
 
4961
@noindent
4962
@findex make_safe_from
4963
Here two RTL insns are generated, one to clear the entire output operand
4964
and the other to copy the input operand into its low half.  This sequence
4965
is incorrect if the input operand refers to [the old value of] the output
4966
operand, so the preparation statement makes sure this isn't so.  The
4967
function @code{make_safe_from} copies the @code{operands[1]} into a
4968
temporary register if it refers to @code{operands[0]}.  It does this
4969
by emitting another RTL insn.
4970
 
4971
Finally, a third example shows the use of an internal operand.
4972
Zero-extension on the SPUR chip is done by @code{and}-ing the result
4973
against a halfword mask.  But this mask cannot be represented by a
4974
@code{const_int} because the constant value is too large to be legitimate
4975
on this machine.  So it must be copied into a register with
4976
@code{force_reg} and then the register used in the @code{and}.
4977
 
4978
@smallexample
4979
(define_expand "zero_extendhisi2"
4980
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "")
4981
        (and:SI (subreg:SI
4982
                  (match_operand:HI 1 "register_operand" "")
4983
                  0)
4984
                (match_dup 2)))]
4985
  ""
4986
  "operands[2]
4987
     = force_reg (SImode, GEN_INT (65535)); ")
4988
@end smallexample
4989
 
4990
@emph{Note:} If the @code{define_expand} is used to serve a
4991
standard binary or unary arithmetic operation or a bit-field operation,
4992
then the last insn it generates must not be a @code{code_label},
4993
@code{barrier} or @code{note}.  It must be an @code{insn},
4994
@code{jump_insn} or @code{call_insn}.  If you don't need a real insn
4995
at the end, emit an insn to copy the result of the operation into
4996
itself.  Such an insn will generate no code, but it can avoid problems
4997
in the compiler.
4998
 
4999
@end ifset
5000
@ifset INTERNALS
5001
@node Insn Splitting
5002
@section Defining How to Split Instructions
5003
@cindex insn splitting
5004
@cindex instruction splitting
5005
@cindex splitting instructions
5006
 
5007
There are two cases where you should specify how to split a pattern
5008
into multiple insns.  On machines that have instructions requiring
5009
delay slots (@pxref{Delay Slots}) or that have instructions whose
5010
output is not available for multiple cycles (@pxref{Processor pipeline
5011
description}), the compiler phases that optimize these cases need to
5012
be able to move insns into one-instruction delay slots.  However, some
5013
insns may generate more than one machine instruction.  These insns
5014
cannot be placed into a delay slot.
5015
 
5016
Often you can rewrite the single insn as a list of individual insns,
5017
each corresponding to one machine instruction.  The disadvantage of
5018
doing so is that it will cause the compilation to be slower and require
5019
more space.  If the resulting insns are too complex, it may also
5020
suppress some optimizations.  The compiler splits the insn if there is a
5021
reason to believe that it might improve instruction or delay slot
5022
scheduling.
5023
 
5024
The insn combiner phase also splits putative insns.  If three insns are
5025
merged into one insn with a complex expression that cannot be matched by
5026
some @code{define_insn} pattern, the combiner phase attempts to split
5027
the complex pattern into two insns that are recognized.  Usually it can
5028
break the complex pattern into two patterns by splitting out some
5029
subexpression.  However, in some other cases, such as performing an
5030
addition of a large constant in two insns on a RISC machine, the way to
5031
split the addition into two insns is machine-dependent.
5032
 
5033
@findex define_split
5034
The @code{define_split} definition tells the compiler how to split a
5035
complex insn into several simpler insns.  It looks like this:
5036
 
5037
@smallexample
5038
(define_split
5039
  [@var{insn-pattern}]
5040
  "@var{condition}"
5041
  [@var{new-insn-pattern-1}
5042
   @var{new-insn-pattern-2}
5043
   @dots{}]
5044
  "@var{preparation-statements}")
5045
@end smallexample
5046
 
5047
@var{insn-pattern} is a pattern that needs to be split and
5048
@var{condition} is the final condition to be tested, as in a
5049
@code{define_insn}.  When an insn matching @var{insn-pattern} and
5050
satisfying @var{condition} is found, it is replaced in the insn list
5051
with the insns given by @var{new-insn-pattern-1},
5052
@var{new-insn-pattern-2}, etc.
5053
 
5054
The @var{preparation-statements} are similar to those statements that
5055
are specified for @code{define_expand} (@pxref{Expander Definitions})
5056
and are executed before the new RTL is generated to prepare for the
5057
generated code or emit some insns whose pattern is not fixed.  Unlike
5058
those in @code{define_expand}, however, these statements must not
5059
generate any new pseudo-registers.  Once reload has completed, they also
5060
must not allocate any space in the stack frame.
5061
 
5062
Patterns are matched against @var{insn-pattern} in two different
5063
circumstances.  If an insn needs to be split for delay slot scheduling
5064
or insn scheduling, the insn is already known to be valid, which means
5065
that it must have been matched by some @code{define_insn} and, if
5066
@code{reload_completed} is nonzero, is known to satisfy the constraints
5067
of that @code{define_insn}.  In that case, the new insn patterns must
5068
also be insns that are matched by some @code{define_insn} and, if
5069
@code{reload_completed} is nonzero, must also satisfy the constraints
5070
of those definitions.
5071
 
5072
As an example of this usage of @code{define_split}, consider the following
5073
example from @file{a29k.md}, which splits a @code{sign_extend} from
5074
@code{HImode} to @code{SImode} into a pair of shift insns:
5075
 
5076
@smallexample
5077
(define_split
5078
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "gen_reg_operand" "")
5079
        (sign_extend:SI (match_operand:HI 1 "gen_reg_operand" "")))]
5080
  ""
5081
  [(set (match_dup 0)
5082
        (ashift:SI (match_dup 1)
5083
                   (const_int 16)))
5084
   (set (match_dup 0)
5085
        (ashiftrt:SI (match_dup 0)
5086
                     (const_int 16)))]
5087
  "
5088
@{ operands[1] = gen_lowpart (SImode, operands[1]); @}")
5089
@end smallexample
5090
 
5091
When the combiner phase tries to split an insn pattern, it is always the
5092
case that the pattern is @emph{not} matched by any @code{define_insn}.
5093
The combiner pass first tries to split a single @code{set} expression
5094
and then the same @code{set} expression inside a @code{parallel}, but
5095
followed by a @code{clobber} of a pseudo-reg to use as a scratch
5096
register.  In these cases, the combiner expects exactly two new insn
5097
patterns to be generated.  It will verify that these patterns match some
5098
@code{define_insn} definitions, so you need not do this test in the
5099
@code{define_split} (of course, there is no point in writing a
5100
@code{define_split} that will never produce insns that match).
5101
 
5102
Here is an example of this use of @code{define_split}, taken from
5103
@file{rs6000.md}:
5104
 
5105
@smallexample
5106
(define_split
5107
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "gen_reg_operand" "")
5108
        (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "gen_reg_operand" "")
5109
                 (match_operand:SI 2 "non_add_cint_operand" "")))]
5110
  ""
5111
  [(set (match_dup 0) (plus:SI (match_dup 1) (match_dup 3)))
5112
   (set (match_dup 0) (plus:SI (match_dup 0) (match_dup 4)))]
5113
"
5114
@{
5115
  int low = INTVAL (operands[2]) & 0xffff;
5116
  int high = (unsigned) INTVAL (operands[2]) >> 16;
5117
 
5118
  if (low & 0x8000)
5119
    high++, low |= 0xffff0000;
5120
 
5121
  operands[3] = GEN_INT (high << 16);
5122
  operands[4] = GEN_INT (low);
5123
@}")
5124
@end smallexample
5125
 
5126
Here the predicate @code{non_add_cint_operand} matches any
5127
@code{const_int} that is @emph{not} a valid operand of a single add
5128
insn.  The add with the smaller displacement is written so that it
5129
can be substituted into the address of a subsequent operation.
5130
 
5131
An example that uses a scratch register, from the same file, generates
5132
an equality comparison of a register and a large constant:
5133
 
5134
@smallexample
5135
(define_split
5136
  [(set (match_operand:CC 0 "cc_reg_operand" "")
5137
        (compare:CC (match_operand:SI 1 "gen_reg_operand" "")
5138
                    (match_operand:SI 2 "non_short_cint_operand" "")))
5139
   (clobber (match_operand:SI 3 "gen_reg_operand" ""))]
5140
  "find_single_use (operands[0], insn, 0)
5141
   && (GET_CODE (*find_single_use (operands[0], insn, 0)) == EQ
5142
       || GET_CODE (*find_single_use (operands[0], insn, 0)) == NE)"
5143
  [(set (match_dup 3) (xor:SI (match_dup 1) (match_dup 4)))
5144
   (set (match_dup 0) (compare:CC (match_dup 3) (match_dup 5)))]
5145
  "
5146
@{
5147
  /* @r{Get the constant we are comparing against, C, and see what it
5148
     looks like sign-extended to 16 bits.  Then see what constant
5149
     could be XOR'ed with C to get the sign-extended value.}  */
5150
 
5151
  int c = INTVAL (operands[2]);
5152
  int sextc = (c << 16) >> 16;
5153
  int xorv = c ^ sextc;
5154
 
5155
  operands[4] = GEN_INT (xorv);
5156
  operands[5] = GEN_INT (sextc);
5157
@}")
5158
@end smallexample
5159
 
5160
To avoid confusion, don't write a single @code{define_split} that
5161
accepts some insns that match some @code{define_insn} as well as some
5162
insns that don't.  Instead, write two separate @code{define_split}
5163
definitions, one for the insns that are valid and one for the insns that
5164
are not valid.
5165
 
5166
The splitter is allowed to split jump instructions into sequence of
5167
jumps or create new jumps in while splitting non-jump instructions.  As
5168
the central flowgraph and branch prediction information needs to be updated,
5169
several restriction apply.
5170
 
5171
Splitting of jump instruction into sequence that over by another jump
5172
instruction is always valid, as compiler expect identical behavior of new
5173
jump.  When new sequence contains multiple jump instructions or new labels,
5174
more assistance is needed.  Splitter is required to create only unconditional
5175
jumps, or simple conditional jump instructions.  Additionally it must attach a
5176
@code{REG_BR_PROB} note to each conditional jump.  A global variable
5177
@code{split_branch_probability} holds the probability of the original branch in case
5178
it was an simple conditional jump, @minus{}1 otherwise.  To simplify
5179
recomputing of edge frequencies, the new sequence is required to have only
5180
forward jumps to the newly created labels.
5181
 
5182
@findex define_insn_and_split
5183
For the common case where the pattern of a define_split exactly matches the
5184
pattern of a define_insn, use @code{define_insn_and_split}.  It looks like
5185
this:
5186
 
5187
@smallexample
5188
(define_insn_and_split
5189
  [@var{insn-pattern}]
5190
  "@var{condition}"
5191
  "@var{output-template}"
5192
  "@var{split-condition}"
5193
  [@var{new-insn-pattern-1}
5194
   @var{new-insn-pattern-2}
5195
   @dots{}]
5196
  "@var{preparation-statements}"
5197
  [@var{insn-attributes}])
5198
 
5199
@end smallexample
5200
 
5201
@var{insn-pattern}, @var{condition}, @var{output-template}, and
5202
@var{insn-attributes} are used as in @code{define_insn}.  The
5203
@var{new-insn-pattern} vector and the @var{preparation-statements} are used as
5204
in a @code{define_split}.  The @var{split-condition} is also used as in
5205
@code{define_split}, with the additional behavior that if the condition starts
5206
with @samp{&&}, the condition used for the split will be the constructed as a
5207
logical ``and'' of the split condition with the insn condition.  For example,
5208
from i386.md:
5209
 
5210
@smallexample
5211
(define_insn_and_split "zero_extendhisi2_and"
5212
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "=r")
5213
     (zero_extend:SI (match_operand:HI 1 "register_operand" "0")))
5214
   (clobber (reg:CC 17))]
5215
  "TARGET_ZERO_EXTEND_WITH_AND && !optimize_size"
5216
  "#"
5217
  "&& reload_completed"
5218
  [(parallel [(set (match_dup 0)
5219
                   (and:SI (match_dup 0) (const_int 65535)))
5220
              (clobber (reg:CC 17))])]
5221
  ""
5222
  [(set_attr "type" "alu1")])
5223
 
5224
@end smallexample
5225
 
5226
In this case, the actual split condition will be
5227
@samp{TARGET_ZERO_EXTEND_WITH_AND && !optimize_size && reload_completed}.
5228
 
5229
The @code{define_insn_and_split} construction provides exactly the same
5230
functionality as two separate @code{define_insn} and @code{define_split}
5231
patterns.  It exists for compactness, and as a maintenance tool to prevent
5232
having to ensure the two patterns' templates match.
5233
 
5234
@end ifset
5235
@ifset INTERNALS
5236
@node Including Patterns
5237
@section Including Patterns in Machine Descriptions.
5238
@cindex insn includes
5239
 
5240
@findex include
5241
The @code{include} pattern tells the compiler tools where to
5242
look for patterns that are in files other than in the file
5243
@file{.md}.  This is used only at build time and there is no preprocessing allowed.
5244
 
5245
It looks like:
5246
 
5247
@smallexample
5248
 
5249
(include
5250
  @var{pathname})
5251
@end smallexample
5252
 
5253
For example:
5254
 
5255
@smallexample
5256
 
5257
(include "filestuff")
5258
 
5259
@end smallexample
5260
 
5261
Where @var{pathname} is a string that specifies the location of the file,
5262
specifies the include file to be in @file{gcc/config/target/filestuff}.  The
5263
directory @file{gcc/config/target} is regarded as the default directory.
5264
 
5265
 
5266
Machine descriptions may be split up into smaller more manageable subsections
5267
and placed into subdirectories.
5268
 
5269
By specifying:
5270
 
5271
@smallexample
5272
 
5273
(include "BOGUS/filestuff")
5274
 
5275
@end smallexample
5276
 
5277
the include file is specified to be in @file{gcc/config/@var{target}/BOGUS/filestuff}.
5278
 
5279
Specifying an absolute path for the include file such as;
5280
@smallexample
5281
 
5282
(include "/u2/BOGUS/filestuff")
5283
 
5284
@end smallexample
5285
is permitted but is not encouraged.
5286
 
5287
@subsection RTL Generation Tool Options for Directory Search
5288
@cindex directory options .md
5289
@cindex options, directory search
5290
@cindex search options
5291
 
5292
The @option{-I@var{dir}} option specifies directories to search for machine descriptions.
5293
For example:
5294
 
5295
@smallexample
5296
 
5297
genrecog -I/p1/abc/proc1 -I/p2/abcd/pro2 target.md
5298
 
5299
@end smallexample
5300
 
5301
 
5302
Add the directory @var{dir} to the head of the list of directories to be
5303
searched for header files.  This can be used to override a system machine definition
5304
file, substituting your own version, since these directories are
5305
searched before the default machine description file directories.  If you use more than
5306
one @option{-I} option, the directories are scanned in left-to-right
5307
order; the standard default directory come after.
5308
 
5309
 
5310
@end ifset
5311
@ifset INTERNALS
5312
@node Peephole Definitions
5313
@section Machine-Specific Peephole Optimizers
5314
@cindex peephole optimizer definitions
5315
@cindex defining peephole optimizers
5316
 
5317
In addition to instruction patterns the @file{md} file may contain
5318
definitions of machine-specific peephole optimizations.
5319
 
5320
The combiner does not notice certain peephole optimizations when the data
5321
flow in the program does not suggest that it should try them.  For example,
5322
sometimes two consecutive insns related in purpose can be combined even
5323
though the second one does not appear to use a register computed in the
5324
first one.  A machine-specific peephole optimizer can detect such
5325
opportunities.
5326
 
5327
There are two forms of peephole definitions that may be used.  The
5328
original @code{define_peephole} is run at assembly output time to
5329
match insns and substitute assembly text.  Use of @code{define_peephole}
5330
is deprecated.
5331
 
5332
A newer @code{define_peephole2} matches insns and substitutes new
5333
insns.  The @code{peephole2} pass is run after register allocation
5334
but before scheduling, which may result in much better code for
5335
targets that do scheduling.
5336
 
5337
@menu
5338
* define_peephole::     RTL to Text Peephole Optimizers
5339
* define_peephole2::    RTL to RTL Peephole Optimizers
5340
@end menu
5341
 
5342
@end ifset
5343
@ifset INTERNALS
5344
@node define_peephole
5345
@subsection RTL to Text Peephole Optimizers
5346
@findex define_peephole
5347
 
5348
@need 1000
5349
A definition looks like this:
5350
 
5351
@smallexample
5352
(define_peephole
5353
  [@var{insn-pattern-1}
5354
   @var{insn-pattern-2}
5355
   @dots{}]
5356
  "@var{condition}"
5357
  "@var{template}"
5358
  "@var{optional-insn-attributes}")
5359
@end smallexample
5360
 
5361
@noindent
5362
The last string operand may be omitted if you are not using any
5363
machine-specific information in this machine description.  If present,
5364
it must obey the same rules as in a @code{define_insn}.
5365
 
5366
In this skeleton, @var{insn-pattern-1} and so on are patterns to match
5367
consecutive insns.  The optimization applies to a sequence of insns when
5368
@var{insn-pattern-1} matches the first one, @var{insn-pattern-2} matches
5369
the next, and so on.
5370
 
5371
Each of the insns matched by a peephole must also match a
5372
@code{define_insn}.  Peepholes are checked only at the last stage just
5373
before code generation, and only optionally.  Therefore, any insn which
5374
would match a peephole but no @code{define_insn} will cause a crash in code
5375
generation in an unoptimized compilation, or at various optimization
5376
stages.
5377
 
5378
The operands of the insns are matched with @code{match_operands},
5379
@code{match_operator}, and @code{match_dup}, as usual.  What is not
5380
usual is that the operand numbers apply to all the insn patterns in the
5381
definition.  So, you can check for identical operands in two insns by
5382
using @code{match_operand} in one insn and @code{match_dup} in the
5383
other.
5384
 
5385
The operand constraints used in @code{match_operand} patterns do not have
5386
any direct effect on the applicability of the peephole, but they will
5387
be validated afterward, so make sure your constraints are general enough
5388
to apply whenever the peephole matches.  If the peephole matches
5389
but the constraints are not satisfied, the compiler will crash.
5390
 
5391
It is safe to omit constraints in all the operands of the peephole; or
5392
you can write constraints which serve as a double-check on the criteria
5393
previously tested.
5394
 
5395
Once a sequence of insns matches the patterns, the @var{condition} is
5396
checked.  This is a C expression which makes the final decision whether to
5397
perform the optimization (we do so if the expression is nonzero).  If
5398
@var{condition} is omitted (in other words, the string is empty) then the
5399
optimization is applied to every sequence of insns that matches the
5400
patterns.
5401
 
5402
The defined peephole optimizations are applied after register allocation
5403
is complete.  Therefore, the peephole definition can check which
5404
operands have ended up in which kinds of registers, just by looking at
5405
the operands.
5406
 
5407
@findex prev_active_insn
5408
The way to refer to the operands in @var{condition} is to write
5409
@code{operands[@var{i}]} for operand number @var{i} (as matched by
5410
@code{(match_operand @var{i} @dots{})}).  Use the variable @code{insn}
5411
to refer to the last of the insns being matched; use
5412
@code{prev_active_insn} to find the preceding insns.
5413
 
5414
@findex dead_or_set_p
5415
When optimizing computations with intermediate results, you can use
5416
@var{condition} to match only when the intermediate results are not used
5417
elsewhere.  Use the C expression @code{dead_or_set_p (@var{insn},
5418
@var{op})}, where @var{insn} is the insn in which you expect the value
5419
to be used for the last time (from the value of @code{insn}, together
5420
with use of @code{prev_nonnote_insn}), and @var{op} is the intermediate
5421
value (from @code{operands[@var{i}]}).
5422
 
5423
Applying the optimization means replacing the sequence of insns with one
5424
new insn.  The @var{template} controls ultimate output of assembler code
5425
for this combined insn.  It works exactly like the template of a
5426
@code{define_insn}.  Operand numbers in this template are the same ones
5427
used in matching the original sequence of insns.
5428
 
5429
The result of a defined peephole optimizer does not need to match any of
5430
the insn patterns in the machine description; it does not even have an
5431
opportunity to match them.  The peephole optimizer definition itself serves
5432
as the insn pattern to control how the insn is output.
5433
 
5434
Defined peephole optimizers are run as assembler code is being output,
5435
so the insns they produce are never combined or rearranged in any way.
5436
 
5437
Here is an example, taken from the 68000 machine description:
5438
 
5439
@smallexample
5440
(define_peephole
5441
  [(set (reg:SI 15) (plus:SI (reg:SI 15) (const_int 4)))
5442
   (set (match_operand:DF 0 "register_operand" "=f")
5443
        (match_operand:DF 1 "register_operand" "ad"))]
5444
  "FP_REG_P (operands[0]) && ! FP_REG_P (operands[1])"
5445
@{
5446
  rtx xoperands[2];
5447
  xoperands[1] = gen_rtx_REG (SImode, REGNO (operands[1]) + 1);
5448
#ifdef MOTOROLA
5449
  output_asm_insn ("move.l %1,(sp)", xoperands);
5450
  output_asm_insn ("move.l %1,-(sp)", operands);
5451
  return "fmove.d (sp)+,%0";
5452
#else
5453
  output_asm_insn ("movel %1,sp@@", xoperands);
5454
  output_asm_insn ("movel %1,sp@@-", operands);
5455
  return "fmoved sp@@+,%0";
5456
#endif
5457
@})
5458
@end smallexample
5459
 
5460
@need 1000
5461
The effect of this optimization is to change
5462
 
5463
@smallexample
5464
@group
5465
jbsr _foobar
5466
addql #4,sp
5467
movel d1,sp@@-
5468
movel d0,sp@@-
5469
fmoved sp@@+,fp0
5470
@end group
5471
@end smallexample
5472
 
5473
@noindent
5474
into
5475
 
5476
@smallexample
5477
@group
5478
jbsr _foobar
5479
movel d1,sp@@
5480
movel d0,sp@@-
5481
fmoved sp@@+,fp0
5482
@end group
5483
@end smallexample
5484
 
5485
@ignore
5486
@findex CC_REVERSED
5487
If a peephole matches a sequence including one or more jump insns, you must
5488
take account of the flags such as @code{CC_REVERSED} which specify that the
5489
condition codes are represented in an unusual manner.  The compiler
5490
automatically alters any ordinary conditional jumps which occur in such
5491
situations, but the compiler cannot alter jumps which have been replaced by
5492
peephole optimizations.  So it is up to you to alter the assembler code
5493
that the peephole produces.  Supply C code to write the assembler output,
5494
and in this C code check the condition code status flags and change the
5495
assembler code as appropriate.
5496
@end ignore
5497
 
5498
@var{insn-pattern-1} and so on look @emph{almost} like the second
5499
operand of @code{define_insn}.  There is one important difference: the
5500
second operand of @code{define_insn} consists of one or more RTX's
5501
enclosed in square brackets.  Usually, there is only one: then the same
5502
action can be written as an element of a @code{define_peephole}.  But
5503
when there are multiple actions in a @code{define_insn}, they are
5504
implicitly enclosed in a @code{parallel}.  Then you must explicitly
5505
write the @code{parallel}, and the square brackets within it, in the
5506
@code{define_peephole}.  Thus, if an insn pattern looks like this,
5507
 
5508
@smallexample
5509
(define_insn "divmodsi4"
5510
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=d")
5511
        (div:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "0")
5512
                (match_operand:SI 2 "general_operand" "dmsK")))
5513
   (set (match_operand:SI 3 "general_operand" "=d")
5514
        (mod:SI (match_dup 1) (match_dup 2)))]
5515
  "TARGET_68020"
5516
  "divsl%.l %2,%3:%0")
5517
@end smallexample
5518
 
5519
@noindent
5520
then the way to mention this insn in a peephole is as follows:
5521
 
5522
@smallexample
5523
(define_peephole
5524
  [@dots{}
5525
   (parallel
5526
    [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=d")
5527
          (div:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "0")
5528
                  (match_operand:SI 2 "general_operand" "dmsK")))
5529
     (set (match_operand:SI 3 "general_operand" "=d")
5530
          (mod:SI (match_dup 1) (match_dup 2)))])
5531
   @dots{}]
5532
  @dots{})
5533
@end smallexample
5534
 
5535
@end ifset
5536
@ifset INTERNALS
5537
@node define_peephole2
5538
@subsection RTL to RTL Peephole Optimizers
5539
@findex define_peephole2
5540
 
5541
The @code{define_peephole2} definition tells the compiler how to
5542
substitute one sequence of instructions for another sequence,
5543
what additional scratch registers may be needed and what their
5544
lifetimes must be.
5545
 
5546
@smallexample
5547
(define_peephole2
5548
  [@var{insn-pattern-1}
5549
   @var{insn-pattern-2}
5550
   @dots{}]
5551
  "@var{condition}"
5552
  [@var{new-insn-pattern-1}
5553
   @var{new-insn-pattern-2}
5554
   @dots{}]
5555
  "@var{preparation-statements}")
5556
@end smallexample
5557
 
5558
The definition is almost identical to @code{define_split}
5559
(@pxref{Insn Splitting}) except that the pattern to match is not a
5560
single instruction, but a sequence of instructions.
5561
 
5562
It is possible to request additional scratch registers for use in the
5563
output template.  If appropriate registers are not free, the pattern
5564
will simply not match.
5565
 
5566
@findex match_scratch
5567
@findex match_dup
5568
Scratch registers are requested with a @code{match_scratch} pattern at
5569
the top level of the input pattern.  The allocated register (initially) will
5570
be dead at the point requested within the original sequence.  If the scratch
5571
is used at more than a single point, a @code{match_dup} pattern at the
5572
top level of the input pattern marks the last position in the input sequence
5573
at which the register must be available.
5574
 
5575
Here is an example from the IA-32 machine description:
5576
 
5577
@smallexample
5578
(define_peephole2
5579
  [(match_scratch:SI 2 "r")
5580
   (parallel [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "")
5581
                   (match_operator:SI 3 "arith_or_logical_operator"
5582
                     [(match_dup 0)
5583
                      (match_operand:SI 1 "memory_operand" "")]))
5584
              (clobber (reg:CC 17))])]
5585
  "! optimize_size && ! TARGET_READ_MODIFY"
5586
  [(set (match_dup 2) (match_dup 1))
5587
   (parallel [(set (match_dup 0)
5588
                   (match_op_dup 3 [(match_dup 0) (match_dup 2)]))
5589
              (clobber (reg:CC 17))])]
5590
  "")
5591
@end smallexample
5592
 
5593
@noindent
5594
This pattern tries to split a load from its use in the hopes that we'll be
5595
able to schedule around the memory load latency.  It allocates a single
5596
@code{SImode} register of class @code{GENERAL_REGS} (@code{"r"}) that needs
5597
to be live only at the point just before the arithmetic.
5598
 
5599
A real example requiring extended scratch lifetimes is harder to come by,
5600
so here's a silly made-up example:
5601
 
5602
@smallexample
5603
(define_peephole2
5604
  [(match_scratch:SI 4 "r")
5605
   (set (match_operand:SI 0 "" "") (match_operand:SI 1 "" ""))
5606
   (set (match_operand:SI 2 "" "") (match_dup 1))
5607
   (match_dup 4)
5608
   (set (match_operand:SI 3 "" "") (match_dup 1))]
5609
  "/* @r{determine 1 does not overlap 0 and 2} */"
5610
  [(set (match_dup 4) (match_dup 1))
5611
   (set (match_dup 0) (match_dup 4))
5612
   (set (match_dup 2) (match_dup 4))]
5613
   (set (match_dup 3) (match_dup 4))]
5614
  "")
5615
@end smallexample
5616
 
5617
@noindent
5618
If we had not added the @code{(match_dup 4)} in the middle of the input
5619
sequence, it might have been the case that the register we chose at the
5620
beginning of the sequence is killed by the first or second @code{set}.
5621
 
5622
@end ifset
5623
@ifset INTERNALS
5624
@node Insn Attributes
5625
@section Instruction Attributes
5626
@cindex insn attributes
5627
@cindex instruction attributes
5628
 
5629
In addition to describing the instruction supported by the target machine,
5630
the @file{md} file also defines a group of @dfn{attributes} and a set of
5631
values for each.  Every generated insn is assigned a value for each attribute.
5632
One possible attribute would be the effect that the insn has on the machine's
5633
condition code.  This attribute can then be used by @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC}
5634
to track the condition codes.
5635
 
5636
@menu
5637
* Defining Attributes:: Specifying attributes and their values.
5638
* Expressions::         Valid expressions for attribute values.
5639
* Tagging Insns::       Assigning attribute values to insns.
5640
* Attr Example::        An example of assigning attributes.
5641
* Insn Lengths::        Computing the length of insns.
5642
* Constant Attributes:: Defining attributes that are constant.
5643
* Delay Slots::         Defining delay slots required for a machine.
5644
* Processor pipeline description:: Specifying information for insn scheduling.
5645
@end menu
5646
 
5647
@end ifset
5648
@ifset INTERNALS
5649
@node Defining Attributes
5650
@subsection Defining Attributes and their Values
5651
@cindex defining attributes and their values
5652
@cindex attributes, defining
5653
 
5654
@findex define_attr
5655
The @code{define_attr} expression is used to define each attribute required
5656
by the target machine.  It looks like:
5657
 
5658
@smallexample
5659
(define_attr @var{name} @var{list-of-values} @var{default})
5660
@end smallexample
5661
 
5662
@var{name} is a string specifying the name of the attribute being defined.
5663
 
5664
@var{list-of-values} is either a string that specifies a comma-separated
5665
list of values that can be assigned to the attribute, or a null string to
5666
indicate that the attribute takes numeric values.
5667
 
5668
@var{default} is an attribute expression that gives the value of this
5669
attribute for insns that match patterns whose definition does not include
5670
an explicit value for this attribute.  @xref{Attr Example}, for more
5671
information on the handling of defaults.  @xref{Constant Attributes},
5672
for information on attributes that do not depend on any particular insn.
5673
 
5674
@findex insn-attr.h
5675
For each defined attribute, a number of definitions are written to the
5676
@file{insn-attr.h} file.  For cases where an explicit set of values is
5677
specified for an attribute, the following are defined:
5678
 
5679
@itemize @bullet
5680
@item
5681
A @samp{#define} is written for the symbol @samp{HAVE_ATTR_@var{name}}.
5682
 
5683
@item
5684
An enumerated class is defined for @samp{attr_@var{name}} with
5685
elements of the form @samp{@var{upper-name}_@var{upper-value}} where
5686
the attribute name and value are first converted to uppercase.
5687
 
5688
@item
5689
A function @samp{get_attr_@var{name}} is defined that is passed an insn and
5690
returns the attribute value for that insn.
5691
@end itemize
5692
 
5693
For example, if the following is present in the @file{md} file:
5694
 
5695
@smallexample
5696
(define_attr "type" "branch,fp,load,store,arith" @dots{})
5697
@end smallexample
5698
 
5699
@noindent
5700
the following lines will be written to the file @file{insn-attr.h}.
5701
 
5702
@smallexample
5703
#define HAVE_ATTR_type
5704
enum attr_type @{TYPE_BRANCH, TYPE_FP, TYPE_LOAD,
5705
                 TYPE_STORE, TYPE_ARITH@};
5706
extern enum attr_type get_attr_type ();
5707
@end smallexample
5708
 
5709
If the attribute takes numeric values, no @code{enum} type will be
5710
defined and the function to obtain the attribute's value will return
5711
@code{int}.
5712
 
5713
@end ifset
5714
@ifset INTERNALS
5715
@node Expressions
5716
@subsection Attribute Expressions
5717
@cindex attribute expressions
5718
 
5719
RTL expressions used to define attributes use the codes described above
5720
plus a few specific to attribute definitions, to be discussed below.
5721
Attribute value expressions must have one of the following forms:
5722
 
5723
@table @code
5724
@cindex @code{const_int} and attributes
5725
@item (const_int @var{i})
5726
The integer @var{i} specifies the value of a numeric attribute.  @var{i}
5727
must be non-negative.
5728
 
5729
The value of a numeric attribute can be specified either with a
5730
@code{const_int}, or as an integer represented as a string in
5731
@code{const_string}, @code{eq_attr} (see below), @code{attr},
5732
@code{symbol_ref}, simple arithmetic expressions, and @code{set_attr}
5733
overrides on specific instructions (@pxref{Tagging Insns}).
5734
 
5735
@cindex @code{const_string} and attributes
5736
@item (const_string @var{value})
5737
The string @var{value} specifies a constant attribute value.
5738
If @var{value} is specified as @samp{"*"}, it means that the default value of
5739
the attribute is to be used for the insn containing this expression.
5740
@samp{"*"} obviously cannot be used in the @var{default} expression
5741
of a @code{define_attr}.
5742
 
5743
If the attribute whose value is being specified is numeric, @var{value}
5744
must be a string containing a non-negative integer (normally
5745
@code{const_int} would be used in this case).  Otherwise, it must
5746
contain one of the valid values for the attribute.
5747
 
5748
@cindex @code{if_then_else} and attributes
5749
@item (if_then_else @var{test} @var{true-value} @var{false-value})
5750
@var{test} specifies an attribute test, whose format is defined below.
5751
The value of this expression is @var{true-value} if @var{test} is true,
5752
otherwise it is @var{false-value}.
5753
 
5754
@cindex @code{cond} and attributes
5755
@item (cond [@var{test1} @var{value1} @dots{}] @var{default})
5756
The first operand of this expression is a vector containing an even
5757
number of expressions and consisting of pairs of @var{test} and @var{value}
5758
expressions.  The value of the @code{cond} expression is that of the
5759
@var{value} corresponding to the first true @var{test} expression.  If
5760
none of the @var{test} expressions are true, the value of the @code{cond}
5761
expression is that of the @var{default} expression.
5762
@end table
5763
 
5764
@var{test} expressions can have one of the following forms:
5765
 
5766
@table @code
5767
@cindex @code{const_int} and attribute tests
5768
@item (const_int @var{i})
5769
This test is true if @var{i} is nonzero and false otherwise.
5770
 
5771
@cindex @code{not} and attributes
5772
@cindex @code{ior} and attributes
5773
@cindex @code{and} and attributes
5774
@item (not @var{test})
5775
@itemx (ior @var{test1} @var{test2})
5776
@itemx (and @var{test1} @var{test2})
5777
These tests are true if the indicated logical function is true.
5778
 
5779
@cindex @code{match_operand} and attributes
5780
@item (match_operand:@var{m} @var{n} @var{pred} @var{constraints})
5781
This test is true if operand @var{n} of the insn whose attribute value
5782
is being determined has mode @var{m} (this part of the test is ignored
5783
if @var{m} is @code{VOIDmode}) and the function specified by the string
5784
@var{pred} returns a nonzero value when passed operand @var{n} and mode
5785
@var{m} (this part of the test is ignored if @var{pred} is the null
5786
string).
5787
 
5788
The @var{constraints} operand is ignored and should be the null string.
5789
 
5790
@cindex @code{le} and attributes
5791
@cindex @code{leu} and attributes
5792
@cindex @code{lt} and attributes
5793
@cindex @code{gt} and attributes
5794
@cindex @code{gtu} and attributes
5795
@cindex @code{ge} and attributes
5796
@cindex @code{geu} and attributes
5797
@cindex @code{ne} and attributes
5798
@cindex @code{eq} and attributes
5799
@cindex @code{plus} and attributes
5800
@cindex @code{minus} and attributes
5801
@cindex @code{mult} and attributes
5802
@cindex @code{div} and attributes
5803
@cindex @code{mod} and attributes
5804
@cindex @code{abs} and attributes
5805
@cindex @code{neg} and attributes
5806
@cindex @code{ashift} and attributes
5807
@cindex @code{lshiftrt} and attributes
5808
@cindex @code{ashiftrt} and attributes
5809
@item (le @var{arith1} @var{arith2})
5810
@itemx (leu @var{arith1} @var{arith2})
5811
@itemx (lt @var{arith1} @var{arith2})
5812
@itemx (ltu @var{arith1} @var{arith2})
5813
@itemx (gt @var{arith1} @var{arith2})
5814
@itemx (gtu @var{arith1} @var{arith2})
5815
@itemx (ge @var{arith1} @var{arith2})
5816
@itemx (geu @var{arith1} @var{arith2})
5817
@itemx (ne @var{arith1} @var{arith2})
5818
@itemx (eq @var{arith1} @var{arith2})
5819
These tests are true if the indicated comparison of the two arithmetic
5820
expressions is true.  Arithmetic expressions are formed with
5821
@code{plus}, @code{minus}, @code{mult}, @code{div}, @code{mod},
5822
@code{abs}, @code{neg}, @code{and}, @code{ior}, @code{xor}, @code{not},
5823
@code{ashift}, @code{lshiftrt}, and @code{ashiftrt} expressions.
5824
 
5825
@findex get_attr
5826
@code{const_int} and @code{symbol_ref} are always valid terms (@pxref{Insn
5827
Lengths},for additional forms).  @code{symbol_ref} is a string
5828
denoting a C expression that yields an @code{int} when evaluated by the
5829
@samp{get_attr_@dots{}} routine.  It should normally be a global
5830
variable.
5831
 
5832
@findex eq_attr
5833
@item (eq_attr @var{name} @var{value})
5834
@var{name} is a string specifying the name of an attribute.
5835
 
5836
@var{value} is a string that is either a valid value for attribute
5837
@var{name}, a comma-separated list of values, or @samp{!} followed by a
5838
value or list.  If @var{value} does not begin with a @samp{!}, this
5839
test is true if the value of the @var{name} attribute of the current
5840
insn is in the list specified by @var{value}.  If @var{value} begins
5841
with a @samp{!}, this test is true if the attribute's value is
5842
@emph{not} in the specified list.
5843
 
5844
For example,
5845
 
5846
@smallexample
5847
(eq_attr "type" "load,store")
5848
@end smallexample
5849
 
5850
@noindent
5851
is equivalent to
5852
 
5853
@smallexample
5854
(ior (eq_attr "type" "load") (eq_attr "type" "store"))
5855
@end smallexample
5856
 
5857
If @var{name} specifies an attribute of @samp{alternative}, it refers to the
5858
value of the compiler variable @code{which_alternative}
5859
(@pxref{Output Statement}) and the values must be small integers.  For
5860
example,
5861
 
5862
@smallexample
5863
(eq_attr "alternative" "2,3")
5864
@end smallexample
5865
 
5866
@noindent
5867
is equivalent to
5868
 
5869
@smallexample
5870
(ior (eq (symbol_ref "which_alternative") (const_int 2))
5871
     (eq (symbol_ref "which_alternative") (const_int 3)))
5872
@end smallexample
5873
 
5874
Note that, for most attributes, an @code{eq_attr} test is simplified in cases
5875
where the value of the attribute being tested is known for all insns matching
5876
a particular pattern.  This is by far the most common case.
5877
 
5878
@findex attr_flag
5879
@item (attr_flag @var{name})
5880
The value of an @code{attr_flag} expression is true if the flag
5881
specified by @var{name} is true for the @code{insn} currently being
5882
scheduled.
5883
 
5884
@var{name} is a string specifying one of a fixed set of flags to test.
5885
Test the flags @code{forward} and @code{backward} to determine the
5886
direction of a conditional branch.  Test the flags @code{very_likely},
5887
@code{likely}, @code{very_unlikely}, and @code{unlikely} to determine
5888
if a conditional branch is expected to be taken.
5889
 
5890
If the @code{very_likely} flag is true, then the @code{likely} flag is also
5891
true.  Likewise for the @code{very_unlikely} and @code{unlikely} flags.
5892
 
5893
This example describes a conditional branch delay slot which
5894
can be nullified for forward branches that are taken (annul-true) or
5895
for backward branches which are not taken (annul-false).
5896
 
5897
@smallexample
5898
(define_delay (eq_attr "type" "cbranch")
5899
  [(eq_attr "in_branch_delay" "true")
5900
   (and (eq_attr "in_branch_delay" "true")
5901
        (attr_flag "forward"))
5902
   (and (eq_attr "in_branch_delay" "true")
5903
        (attr_flag "backward"))])
5904
@end smallexample
5905
 
5906
The @code{forward} and @code{backward} flags are false if the current
5907
@code{insn} being scheduled is not a conditional branch.
5908
 
5909
The @code{very_likely} and @code{likely} flags are true if the
5910
@code{insn} being scheduled is not a conditional branch.
5911
The @code{very_unlikely} and @code{unlikely} flags are false if the
5912
@code{insn} being scheduled is not a conditional branch.
5913
 
5914
@code{attr_flag} is only used during delay slot scheduling and has no
5915
meaning to other passes of the compiler.
5916
 
5917
@findex attr
5918
@item (attr @var{name})
5919
The value of another attribute is returned.  This is most useful
5920
for numeric attributes, as @code{eq_attr} and @code{attr_flag}
5921
produce more efficient code for non-numeric attributes.
5922
@end table
5923
 
5924
@end ifset
5925
@ifset INTERNALS
5926
@node Tagging Insns
5927
@subsection Assigning Attribute Values to Insns
5928
@cindex tagging insns
5929
@cindex assigning attribute values to insns
5930
 
5931
The value assigned to an attribute of an insn is primarily determined by
5932
which pattern is matched by that insn (or which @code{define_peephole}
5933
generated it).  Every @code{define_insn} and @code{define_peephole} can
5934
have an optional last argument to specify the values of attributes for
5935
matching insns.  The value of any attribute not specified in a particular
5936
insn is set to the default value for that attribute, as specified in its
5937
@code{define_attr}.  Extensive use of default values for attributes
5938
permits the specification of the values for only one or two attributes
5939
in the definition of most insn patterns, as seen in the example in the
5940
next section.
5941
 
5942
The optional last argument of @code{define_insn} and
5943
@code{define_peephole} is a vector of expressions, each of which defines
5944
the value for a single attribute.  The most general way of assigning an
5945
attribute's value is to use a @code{set} expression whose first operand is an
5946
@code{attr} expression giving the name of the attribute being set.  The
5947
second operand of the @code{set} is an attribute expression
5948
(@pxref{Expressions}) giving the value of the attribute.
5949
 
5950
When the attribute value depends on the @samp{alternative} attribute
5951
(i.e., which is the applicable alternative in the constraint of the
5952
insn), the @code{set_attr_alternative} expression can be used.  It
5953
allows the specification of a vector of attribute expressions, one for
5954
each alternative.
5955
 
5956
@findex set_attr
5957
When the generality of arbitrary attribute expressions is not required,
5958
the simpler @code{set_attr} expression can be used, which allows
5959
specifying a string giving either a single attribute value or a list
5960
of attribute values, one for each alternative.
5961
 
5962
The form of each of the above specifications is shown below.  In each case,
5963
@var{name} is a string specifying the attribute to be set.
5964
 
5965
@table @code
5966
@item (set_attr @var{name} @var{value-string})
5967
@var{value-string} is either a string giving the desired attribute value,
5968
or a string containing a comma-separated list giving the values for
5969
succeeding alternatives.  The number of elements must match the number
5970
of alternatives in the constraint of the insn pattern.
5971
 
5972
Note that it may be useful to specify @samp{*} for some alternative, in
5973
which case the attribute will assume its default value for insns matching
5974
that alternative.
5975
 
5976
@findex set_attr_alternative
5977
@item (set_attr_alternative @var{name} [@var{value1} @var{value2} @dots{}])
5978
Depending on the alternative of the insn, the value will be one of the
5979
specified values.  This is a shorthand for using a @code{cond} with
5980
tests on the @samp{alternative} attribute.
5981
 
5982
@findex attr
5983
@item (set (attr @var{name}) @var{value})
5984
The first operand of this @code{set} must be the special RTL expression
5985
@code{attr}, whose sole operand is a string giving the name of the
5986
attribute being set.  @var{value} is the value of the attribute.
5987
@end table
5988
 
5989
The following shows three different ways of representing the same
5990
attribute value specification:
5991
 
5992
@smallexample
5993
(set_attr "type" "load,store,arith")
5994
 
5995
(set_attr_alternative "type"
5996
                      [(const_string "load") (const_string "store")
5997
                       (const_string "arith")])
5998
 
5999
(set (attr "type")
6000
     (cond [(eq_attr "alternative" "1") (const_string "load")
6001
            (eq_attr "alternative" "2") (const_string "store")]
6002
           (const_string "arith")))
6003
@end smallexample
6004
 
6005
@need 1000
6006
@findex define_asm_attributes
6007
The @code{define_asm_attributes} expression provides a mechanism to
6008
specify the attributes assigned to insns produced from an @code{asm}
6009
statement.  It has the form:
6010
 
6011
@smallexample
6012
(define_asm_attributes [@var{attr-sets}])
6013
@end smallexample
6014
 
6015
@noindent
6016
where @var{attr-sets} is specified the same as for both the
6017
@code{define_insn} and the @code{define_peephole} expressions.
6018
 
6019
These values will typically be the ``worst case'' attribute values.  For
6020
example, they might indicate that the condition code will be clobbered.
6021
 
6022
A specification for a @code{length} attribute is handled specially.  The
6023
way to compute the length of an @code{asm} insn is to multiply the
6024
length specified in the expression @code{define_asm_attributes} by the
6025
number of machine instructions specified in the @code{asm} statement,
6026
determined by counting the number of semicolons and newlines in the
6027
string.  Therefore, the value of the @code{length} attribute specified
6028
in a @code{define_asm_attributes} should be the maximum possible length
6029
of a single machine instruction.
6030
 
6031
@end ifset
6032
@ifset INTERNALS
6033
@node Attr Example
6034
@subsection Example of Attribute Specifications
6035
@cindex attribute specifications example
6036
@cindex attribute specifications
6037
 
6038
The judicious use of defaulting is important in the efficient use of
6039
insn attributes.  Typically, insns are divided into @dfn{types} and an
6040
attribute, customarily called @code{type}, is used to represent this
6041
value.  This attribute is normally used only to define the default value
6042
for other attributes.  An example will clarify this usage.
6043
 
6044
Assume we have a RISC machine with a condition code and in which only
6045
full-word operations are performed in registers.  Let us assume that we
6046
can divide all insns into loads, stores, (integer) arithmetic
6047
operations, floating point operations, and branches.
6048
 
6049
Here we will concern ourselves with determining the effect of an insn on
6050
the condition code and will limit ourselves to the following possible
6051
effects:  The condition code can be set unpredictably (clobbered), not
6052
be changed, be set to agree with the results of the operation, or only
6053
changed if the item previously set into the condition code has been
6054
modified.
6055
 
6056
Here is part of a sample @file{md} file for such a machine:
6057
 
6058
@smallexample
6059
(define_attr "type" "load,store,arith,fp,branch" (const_string "arith"))
6060
 
6061
(define_attr "cc" "clobber,unchanged,set,change0"
6062
             (cond [(eq_attr "type" "load")
6063
                        (const_string "change0")
6064
                    (eq_attr "type" "store,branch")
6065
                        (const_string "unchanged")
6066
                    (eq_attr "type" "arith")
6067
                        (if_then_else (match_operand:SI 0 "" "")
6068
                                      (const_string "set")
6069
                                      (const_string "clobber"))]
6070
                   (const_string "clobber")))
6071
 
6072
(define_insn ""
6073
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=r,r,m")
6074
        (match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "r,m,r"))]
6075
  ""
6076
  "@@
6077
   move %0,%1
6078
   load %0,%1
6079
   store %0,%1"
6080
  [(set_attr "type" "arith,load,store")])
6081
@end smallexample
6082
 
6083
Note that we assume in the above example that arithmetic operations
6084
performed on quantities smaller than a machine word clobber the condition
6085
code since they will set the condition code to a value corresponding to the
6086
full-word result.
6087
 
6088
@end ifset
6089
@ifset INTERNALS
6090
@node Insn Lengths
6091
@subsection Computing the Length of an Insn
6092
@cindex insn lengths, computing
6093
@cindex computing the length of an insn
6094
 
6095
For many machines, multiple types of branch instructions are provided, each
6096
for different length branch displacements.  In most cases, the assembler
6097
will choose the correct instruction to use.  However, when the assembler
6098
cannot do so, GCC can when a special attribute, the @code{length}
6099
attribute, is defined.  This attribute must be defined to have numeric
6100
values by specifying a null string in its @code{define_attr}.
6101
 
6102
In the case of the @code{length} attribute, two additional forms of
6103
arithmetic terms are allowed in test expressions:
6104
 
6105
@table @code
6106
@cindex @code{match_dup} and attributes
6107
@item (match_dup @var{n})
6108
This refers to the address of operand @var{n} of the current insn, which
6109
must be a @code{label_ref}.
6110
 
6111
@cindex @code{pc} and attributes
6112
@item (pc)
6113
This refers to the address of the @emph{current} insn.  It might have
6114
been more consistent with other usage to make this the address of the
6115
@emph{next} insn but this would be confusing because the length of the
6116
current insn is to be computed.
6117
@end table
6118
 
6119
@cindex @code{addr_vec}, length of
6120
@cindex @code{addr_diff_vec}, length of
6121
For normal insns, the length will be determined by value of the
6122
@code{length} attribute.  In the case of @code{addr_vec} and
6123
@code{addr_diff_vec} insn patterns, the length is computed as
6124
the number of vectors multiplied by the size of each vector.
6125
 
6126
Lengths are measured in addressable storage units (bytes).
6127
 
6128
The following macros can be used to refine the length computation:
6129
 
6130
@table @code
6131
@findex ADJUST_INSN_LENGTH
6132
@item ADJUST_INSN_LENGTH (@var{insn}, @var{length})
6133
If defined, modifies the length assigned to instruction @var{insn} as a
6134
function of the context in which it is used.  @var{length} is an lvalue
6135
that contains the initially computed length of the insn and should be
6136
updated with the correct length of the insn.
6137
 
6138
This macro will normally not be required.  A case in which it is
6139
required is the ROMP@.  On this machine, the size of an @code{addr_vec}
6140
insn must be increased by two to compensate for the fact that alignment
6141
may be required.
6142
@end table
6143
 
6144
@findex get_attr_length
6145
The routine that returns @code{get_attr_length} (the value of the
6146
@code{length} attribute) can be used by the output routine to
6147
determine the form of the branch instruction to be written, as the
6148
example below illustrates.
6149
 
6150
As an example of the specification of variable-length branches, consider
6151
the IBM 360.  If we adopt the convention that a register will be set to
6152
the starting address of a function, we can jump to labels within 4k of
6153
the start using a four-byte instruction.  Otherwise, we need a six-byte
6154
sequence to load the address from memory and then branch to it.
6155
 
6156
On such a machine, a pattern for a branch instruction might be specified
6157
as follows:
6158
 
6159
@smallexample
6160
(define_insn "jump"
6161
  [(set (pc)
6162
        (label_ref (match_operand 0 "" "")))]
6163
  ""
6164
@{
6165
   return (get_attr_length (insn) == 4
6166
           ? "b %l0" : "l r15,=a(%l0); br r15");
6167
@}
6168
  [(set (attr "length")
6169
        (if_then_else (lt (match_dup 0) (const_int 4096))
6170
                      (const_int 4)
6171
                      (const_int 6)))])
6172
@end smallexample
6173
 
6174
@end ifset
6175
@ifset INTERNALS
6176
@node Constant Attributes
6177
@subsection Constant Attributes
6178
@cindex constant attributes
6179
 
6180
A special form of @code{define_attr}, where the expression for the
6181
default value is a @code{const} expression, indicates an attribute that
6182
is constant for a given run of the compiler.  Constant attributes may be
6183
used to specify which variety of processor is used.  For example,
6184
 
6185
@smallexample
6186
(define_attr "cpu" "m88100,m88110,m88000"
6187
 (const
6188
  (cond [(symbol_ref "TARGET_88100") (const_string "m88100")
6189
         (symbol_ref "TARGET_88110") (const_string "m88110")]
6190
        (const_string "m88000"))))
6191
 
6192
(define_attr "memory" "fast,slow"
6193
 (const
6194
  (if_then_else (symbol_ref "TARGET_FAST_MEM")
6195
                (const_string "fast")
6196
                (const_string "slow"))))
6197
@end smallexample
6198
 
6199
The routine generated for constant attributes has no parameters as it
6200
does not depend on any particular insn.  RTL expressions used to define
6201
the value of a constant attribute may use the @code{symbol_ref} form,
6202
but may not use either the @code{match_operand} form or @code{eq_attr}
6203
forms involving insn attributes.
6204
 
6205
@end ifset
6206
@ifset INTERNALS
6207
@node Delay Slots
6208
@subsection Delay Slot Scheduling
6209
@cindex delay slots, defining
6210
 
6211
The insn attribute mechanism can be used to specify the requirements for
6212
delay slots, if any, on a target machine.  An instruction is said to
6213
require a @dfn{delay slot} if some instructions that are physically
6214
after the instruction are executed as if they were located before it.
6215
Classic examples are branch and call instructions, which often execute
6216
the following instruction before the branch or call is performed.
6217
 
6218
On some machines, conditional branch instructions can optionally
6219
@dfn{annul} instructions in the delay slot.  This means that the
6220
instruction will not be executed for certain branch outcomes.  Both
6221
instructions that annul if the branch is true and instructions that
6222
annul if the branch is false are supported.
6223
 
6224
Delay slot scheduling differs from instruction scheduling in that
6225
determining whether an instruction needs a delay slot is dependent only
6226
on the type of instruction being generated, not on data flow between the
6227
instructions.  See the next section for a discussion of data-dependent
6228
instruction scheduling.
6229
 
6230
@findex define_delay
6231
The requirement of an insn needing one or more delay slots is indicated
6232
via the @code{define_delay} expression.  It has the following form:
6233
 
6234
@smallexample
6235
(define_delay @var{test}
6236
              [@var{delay-1} @var{annul-true-1} @var{annul-false-1}
6237
               @var{delay-2} @var{annul-true-2} @var{annul-false-2}
6238
               @dots{}])
6239
@end smallexample
6240
 
6241
@var{test} is an attribute test that indicates whether this
6242
@code{define_delay} applies to a particular insn.  If so, the number of
6243
required delay slots is determined by the length of the vector specified
6244
as the second argument.  An insn placed in delay slot @var{n} must
6245
satisfy attribute test @var{delay-n}.  @var{annul-true-n} is an
6246
attribute test that specifies which insns may be annulled if the branch
6247
is true.  Similarly, @var{annul-false-n} specifies which insns in the
6248
delay slot may be annulled if the branch is false.  If annulling is not
6249
supported for that delay slot, @code{(nil)} should be coded.
6250
 
6251
For example, in the common case where branch and call insns require
6252
a single delay slot, which may contain any insn other than a branch or
6253
call, the following would be placed in the @file{md} file:
6254
 
6255
@smallexample
6256
(define_delay (eq_attr "type" "branch,call")
6257
              [(eq_attr "type" "!branch,call") (nil) (nil)])
6258
@end smallexample
6259
 
6260
Multiple @code{define_delay} expressions may be specified.  In this
6261
case, each such expression specifies different delay slot requirements
6262
and there must be no insn for which tests in two @code{define_delay}
6263
expressions are both true.
6264
 
6265
For example, if we have a machine that requires one delay slot for branches
6266
but two for calls,  no delay slot can contain a branch or call insn,
6267
and any valid insn in the delay slot for the branch can be annulled if the
6268
branch is true, we might represent this as follows:
6269
 
6270
@smallexample
6271
(define_delay (eq_attr "type" "branch")
6272
   [(eq_attr "type" "!branch,call")
6273
    (eq_attr "type" "!branch,call")
6274
    (nil)])
6275
 
6276
(define_delay (eq_attr "type" "call")
6277
              [(eq_attr "type" "!branch,call") (nil) (nil)
6278
               (eq_attr "type" "!branch,call") (nil) (nil)])
6279
@end smallexample
6280
@c the above is *still* too long.  --mew 4feb93
6281
 
6282
@end ifset
6283
@ifset INTERNALS
6284
@node Processor pipeline description
6285
@subsection Specifying processor pipeline description
6286
@cindex processor pipeline description
6287
@cindex processor functional units
6288
@cindex instruction latency time
6289
@cindex interlock delays
6290
@cindex data dependence delays
6291
@cindex reservation delays
6292
@cindex pipeline hazard recognizer
6293
@cindex automaton based pipeline description
6294
@cindex regular expressions
6295
@cindex deterministic finite state automaton
6296
@cindex automaton based scheduler
6297
@cindex RISC
6298
@cindex VLIW
6299
 
6300
To achieve better performance, most modern processors
6301
(super-pipelined, superscalar @acronym{RISC}, and @acronym{VLIW}
6302
processors) have many @dfn{functional units} on which several
6303
instructions can be executed simultaneously.  An instruction starts
6304
execution if its issue conditions are satisfied.  If not, the
6305
instruction is stalled until its conditions are satisfied.  Such
6306
@dfn{interlock (pipeline) delay} causes interruption of the fetching
6307
of successor instructions (or demands nop instructions, e.g.@: for some
6308
MIPS processors).
6309
 
6310
There are two major kinds of interlock delays in modern processors.
6311
The first one is a data dependence delay determining @dfn{instruction
6312
latency time}.  The instruction execution is not started until all
6313
source data have been evaluated by prior instructions (there are more
6314
complex cases when the instruction execution starts even when the data
6315
are not available but will be ready in given time after the
6316
instruction execution start).  Taking the data dependence delays into
6317
account is simple.  The data dependence (true, output, and
6318
anti-dependence) delay between two instructions is given by a
6319
constant.  In most cases this approach is adequate.  The second kind
6320
of interlock delays is a reservation delay.  The reservation delay
6321
means that two instructions under execution will be in need of shared
6322
processors resources, i.e.@: buses, internal registers, and/or
6323
functional units, which are reserved for some time.  Taking this kind
6324
of delay into account is complex especially for modern @acronym{RISC}
6325
processors.
6326
 
6327
The task of exploiting more processor parallelism is solved by an
6328
instruction scheduler.  For a better solution to this problem, the
6329
instruction scheduler has to have an adequate description of the
6330
processor parallelism (or @dfn{pipeline description}).  GCC
6331
machine descriptions describe processor parallelism and functional
6332
unit reservations for groups of instructions with the aid of
6333
@dfn{regular expressions}.
6334
 
6335
The GCC instruction scheduler uses a @dfn{pipeline hazard recognizer} to
6336
figure out the possibility of the instruction issue by the processor
6337
on a given simulated processor cycle.  The pipeline hazard recognizer is
6338
automatically generated from the processor pipeline description.  The
6339
pipeline hazard recognizer generated from the machine description
6340
is based on a deterministic finite state automaton (@acronym{DFA}):
6341
the instruction issue is possible if there is a transition from one
6342
automaton state to another one.  This algorithm is very fast, and
6343
furthermore, its speed is not dependent on processor
6344
complexity@footnote{However, the size of the automaton depends on
6345
  processor complexity.  To limit this effect, machine descriptions
6346
  can split orthogonal parts of the machine description among several
6347
  automata: but then, since each of these must be stepped independently,
6348
  this does cause a small decrease in the algorithm's performance.}.
6349
 
6350
@cindex automaton based pipeline description
6351
The rest of this section describes the directives that constitute
6352
an automaton-based processor pipeline description.  The order of
6353
these constructions within the machine description file is not
6354
important.
6355
 
6356
@findex define_automaton
6357
@cindex pipeline hazard recognizer
6358
The following optional construction describes names of automata
6359
generated and used for the pipeline hazards recognition.  Sometimes
6360
the generated finite state automaton used by the pipeline hazard
6361
recognizer is large.  If we use more than one automaton and bind functional
6362
units to the automata, the total size of the automata is usually
6363
less than the size of the single automaton.  If there is no one such
6364
construction, only one finite state automaton is generated.
6365
 
6366
@smallexample
6367
(define_automaton @var{automata-names})
6368
@end smallexample
6369
 
6370
@var{automata-names} is a string giving names of the automata.  The
6371
names are separated by commas.  All the automata should have unique names.
6372
The automaton name is used in the constructions @code{define_cpu_unit} and
6373
@code{define_query_cpu_unit}.
6374
 
6375
@findex define_cpu_unit
6376
@cindex processor functional units
6377
Each processor functional unit used in the description of instruction
6378
reservations should be described by the following construction.
6379
 
6380
@smallexample
6381
(define_cpu_unit @var{unit-names} [@var{automaton-name}])
6382
@end smallexample
6383
 
6384
@var{unit-names} is a string giving the names of the functional units
6385
separated by commas.  Don't use name @samp{nothing}, it is reserved
6386
for other goals.
6387
 
6388
@var{automaton-name} is a string giving the name of the automaton with
6389
which the unit is bound.  The automaton should be described in
6390
construction @code{define_automaton}.  You should give
6391
@dfn{automaton-name}, if there is a defined automaton.
6392
 
6393
The assignment of units to automata are constrained by the uses of the
6394
units in insn reservations.  The most important constraint is: if a
6395
unit reservation is present on a particular cycle of an alternative
6396
for an insn reservation, then some unit from the same automaton must
6397
be present on the same cycle for the other alternatives of the insn
6398
reservation.  The rest of the constraints are mentioned in the
6399
description of the subsequent constructions.
6400
 
6401
@findex define_query_cpu_unit
6402
@cindex querying function unit reservations
6403
The following construction describes CPU functional units analogously
6404
to @code{define_cpu_unit}.  The reservation of such units can be
6405
queried for an automaton state.  The instruction scheduler never
6406
queries reservation of functional units for given automaton state.  So
6407
as a rule, you don't need this construction.  This construction could
6408
be used for future code generation goals (e.g.@: to generate
6409
@acronym{VLIW} insn templates).
6410
 
6411
@smallexample
6412
(define_query_cpu_unit @var{unit-names} [@var{automaton-name}])
6413
@end smallexample
6414
 
6415
@var{unit-names} is a string giving names of the functional units
6416
separated by commas.
6417
 
6418
@var{automaton-name} is a string giving the name of the automaton with
6419
which the unit is bound.
6420
 
6421
@findex define_insn_reservation
6422
@cindex instruction latency time
6423
@cindex regular expressions
6424
@cindex data bypass
6425
The following construction is the major one to describe pipeline
6426
characteristics of an instruction.
6427
 
6428
@smallexample
6429
(define_insn_reservation @var{insn-name} @var{default_latency}
6430
                         @var{condition} @var{regexp})
6431
@end smallexample
6432
 
6433
@var{default_latency} is a number giving latency time of the
6434
instruction.  There is an important difference between the old
6435
description and the automaton based pipeline description.  The latency
6436
time is used for all dependencies when we use the old description.  In
6437
the automaton based pipeline description, the given latency time is only
6438
used for true dependencies.  The cost of anti-dependencies is always
6439
zero and the cost of output dependencies is the difference between
6440
latency times of the producing and consuming insns (if the difference
6441
is negative, the cost is considered to be zero).  You can always
6442
change the default costs for any description by using the target hook
6443
@code{TARGET_SCHED_ADJUST_COST} (@pxref{Scheduling}).
6444
 
6445
@var{insn-name} is a string giving the internal name of the insn.  The
6446
internal names are used in constructions @code{define_bypass} and in
6447
the automaton description file generated for debugging.  The internal
6448
name has nothing in common with the names in @code{define_insn}.  It is a
6449
good practice to use insn classes described in the processor manual.
6450
 
6451
@var{condition} defines what RTL insns are described by this
6452
construction.  You should remember that you will be in trouble if
6453
@var{condition} for two or more different
6454
@code{define_insn_reservation} constructions is TRUE for an insn.  In
6455
this case what reservation will be used for the insn is not defined.
6456
Such cases are not checked during generation of the pipeline hazards
6457
recognizer because in general recognizing that two conditions may have
6458
the same value is quite difficult (especially if the conditions
6459
contain @code{symbol_ref}).  It is also not checked during the
6460
pipeline hazard recognizer work because it would slow down the
6461
recognizer considerably.
6462
 
6463
@var{regexp} is a string describing the reservation of the cpu's functional
6464
units by the instruction.  The reservations are described by a regular
6465
expression according to the following syntax:
6466
 
6467
@smallexample
6468
       regexp = regexp "," oneof
6469
              | oneof
6470
 
6471
       oneof = oneof "|" allof
6472
             | allof
6473
 
6474
       allof = allof "+" repeat
6475
             | repeat
6476
 
6477
       repeat = element "*" number
6478
              | element
6479
 
6480
       element = cpu_function_unit_name
6481
               | reservation_name
6482
               | result_name
6483
               | "nothing"
6484
               | "(" regexp ")"
6485
@end smallexample
6486
 
6487
@itemize @bullet
6488
@item
6489
@samp{,} is used for describing the start of the next cycle in
6490
the reservation.
6491
 
6492
@item
6493
@samp{|} is used for describing a reservation described by the first
6494
regular expression @strong{or} a reservation described by the second
6495
regular expression @strong{or} etc.
6496
 
6497
@item
6498
@samp{+} is used for describing a reservation described by the first
6499
regular expression @strong{and} a reservation described by the
6500
second regular expression @strong{and} etc.
6501
 
6502
@item
6503
@samp{*} is used for convenience and simply means a sequence in which
6504
the regular expression are repeated @var{number} times with cycle
6505
advancing (see @samp{,}).
6506
 
6507
@item
6508
@samp{cpu_function_unit_name} denotes reservation of the named
6509
functional unit.
6510
 
6511
@item
6512
@samp{reservation_name} --- see description of construction
6513
@samp{define_reservation}.
6514
 
6515
@item
6516
@samp{nothing} denotes no unit reservations.
6517
@end itemize
6518
 
6519
@findex define_reservation
6520
Sometimes unit reservations for different insns contain common parts.
6521
In such case, you can simplify the pipeline description by describing
6522
the common part by the following construction
6523
 
6524
@smallexample
6525
(define_reservation @var{reservation-name} @var{regexp})
6526
@end smallexample
6527
 
6528
@var{reservation-name} is a string giving name of @var{regexp}.
6529
Functional unit names and reservation names are in the same name
6530
space.  So the reservation names should be different from the
6531
functional unit names and can not be the reserved name @samp{nothing}.
6532
 
6533
@findex define_bypass
6534
@cindex instruction latency time
6535
@cindex data bypass
6536
The following construction is used to describe exceptions in the
6537
latency time for given instruction pair.  This is so called bypasses.
6538
 
6539
@smallexample
6540
(define_bypass @var{number} @var{out_insn_names} @var{in_insn_names}
6541
               [@var{guard}])
6542
@end smallexample
6543
 
6544
@var{number} defines when the result generated by the instructions
6545
given in string @var{out_insn_names} will be ready for the
6546
instructions given in string @var{in_insn_names}.  The instructions in
6547
the string are separated by commas.
6548
 
6549
@var{guard} is an optional string giving the name of a C function which
6550
defines an additional guard for the bypass.  The function will get the
6551
two insns as parameters.  If the function returns zero the bypass will
6552
be ignored for this case.  The additional guard is necessary to
6553
recognize complicated bypasses, e.g.@: when the consumer is only an address
6554
of insn @samp{store} (not a stored value).
6555
 
6556
@findex exclusion_set
6557
@findex presence_set
6558
@findex final_presence_set
6559
@findex absence_set
6560
@findex final_absence_set
6561
@cindex VLIW
6562
@cindex RISC
6563
The following five constructions are usually used to describe
6564
@acronym{VLIW} processors, or more precisely, to describe a placement
6565
of small instructions into @acronym{VLIW} instruction slots.  They
6566
can be used for @acronym{RISC} processors, too.
6567
 
6568
@smallexample
6569
(exclusion_set @var{unit-names} @var{unit-names})
6570
(presence_set @var{unit-names} @var{patterns})
6571
(final_presence_set @var{unit-names} @var{patterns})
6572
(absence_set @var{unit-names} @var{patterns})
6573
(final_absence_set @var{unit-names} @var{patterns})
6574
@end smallexample
6575
 
6576
@var{unit-names} is a string giving names of functional units
6577
separated by commas.
6578
 
6579
@var{patterns} is a string giving patterns of functional units
6580
separated by comma.  Currently pattern is one unit or units
6581
separated by white-spaces.
6582
 
6583
The first construction (@samp{exclusion_set}) means that each
6584
functional unit in the first string can not be reserved simultaneously
6585
with a unit whose name is in the second string and vice versa.  For
6586
example, the construction is useful for describing processors
6587
(e.g.@: some SPARC processors) with a fully pipelined floating point
6588
functional unit which can execute simultaneously only single floating
6589
point insns or only double floating point insns.
6590
 
6591
The second construction (@samp{presence_set}) means that each
6592
functional unit in the first string can not be reserved unless at
6593
least one of pattern of units whose names are in the second string is
6594
reserved.  This is an asymmetric relation.  For example, it is useful
6595
for description that @acronym{VLIW} @samp{slot1} is reserved after
6596
@samp{slot0} reservation.  We could describe it by the following
6597
construction
6598
 
6599
@smallexample
6600
(presence_set "slot1" "slot0")
6601
@end smallexample
6602
 
6603
Or @samp{slot1} is reserved only after @samp{slot0} and unit @samp{b0}
6604
reservation.  In this case we could write
6605
 
6606
@smallexample
6607
(presence_set "slot1" "slot0 b0")
6608
@end smallexample
6609
 
6610
The third construction (@samp{final_presence_set}) is analogous to
6611
@samp{presence_set}.  The difference between them is when checking is
6612
done.  When an instruction is issued in given automaton state
6613
reflecting all current and planned unit reservations, the automaton
6614
state is changed.  The first state is a source state, the second one
6615
is a result state.  Checking for @samp{presence_set} is done on the
6616
source state reservation, checking for @samp{final_presence_set} is
6617
done on the result reservation.  This construction is useful to
6618
describe a reservation which is actually two subsequent reservations.
6619
For example, if we use
6620
 
6621
@smallexample
6622
(presence_set "slot1" "slot0")
6623
@end smallexample
6624
 
6625
the following insn will be never issued (because @samp{slot1} requires
6626
@samp{slot0} which is absent in the source state).
6627
 
6628
@smallexample
6629
(define_reservation "insn_and_nop" "slot0 + slot1")
6630
@end smallexample
6631
 
6632
but it can be issued if we use analogous @samp{final_presence_set}.
6633
 
6634
The forth construction (@samp{absence_set}) means that each functional
6635
unit in the first string can be reserved only if each pattern of units
6636
whose names are in the second string is not reserved.  This is an
6637
asymmetric relation (actually @samp{exclusion_set} is analogous to
6638
this one but it is symmetric).  For example, it is useful for
6639
description that @acronym{VLIW} @samp{slot0} can not be reserved after
6640
@samp{slot1} or @samp{slot2} reservation.  We could describe it by the
6641
following construction
6642
 
6643
@smallexample
6644
(absence_set "slot2" "slot0, slot1")
6645
@end smallexample
6646
 
6647
Or @samp{slot2} can not be reserved if @samp{slot0} and unit @samp{b0}
6648
are reserved or @samp{slot1} and unit @samp{b1} are reserved.  In
6649
this case we could write
6650
 
6651
@smallexample
6652
(absence_set "slot2" "slot0 b0, slot1 b1")
6653
@end smallexample
6654
 
6655
All functional units mentioned in a set should belong to the same
6656
automaton.
6657
 
6658
The last construction (@samp{final_absence_set}) is analogous to
6659
@samp{absence_set} but checking is done on the result (state)
6660
reservation.  See comments for @samp{final_presence_set}.
6661
 
6662
@findex automata_option
6663
@cindex deterministic finite state automaton
6664
@cindex nondeterministic finite state automaton
6665
@cindex finite state automaton minimization
6666
You can control the generator of the pipeline hazard recognizer with
6667
the following construction.
6668
 
6669
@smallexample
6670
(automata_option @var{options})
6671
@end smallexample
6672
 
6673
@var{options} is a string giving options which affect the generated
6674
code.  Currently there are the following options:
6675
 
6676
@itemize @bullet
6677
@item
6678
@dfn{no-minimization} makes no minimization of the automaton.  This is
6679
only worth to do when we are debugging the description and need to
6680
look more accurately at reservations of states.
6681
 
6682
@item
6683
@dfn{time} means printing additional time statistics about
6684
generation of automata.
6685
 
6686
@item
6687
@dfn{v} means a generation of the file describing the result automata.
6688
The file has suffix @samp{.dfa} and can be used for the description
6689
verification and debugging.
6690
 
6691
@item
6692
@dfn{w} means a generation of warning instead of error for
6693
non-critical errors.
6694
 
6695
@item
6696
@dfn{ndfa} makes nondeterministic finite state automata.  This affects
6697
the treatment of operator @samp{|} in the regular expressions.  The
6698
usual treatment of the operator is to try the first alternative and,
6699
if the reservation is not possible, the second alternative.  The
6700
nondeterministic treatment means trying all alternatives, some of them
6701
may be rejected by reservations in the subsequent insns.
6702
 
6703
@item
6704
@dfn{progress} means output of a progress bar showing how many states
6705
were generated so far for automaton being processed.  This is useful
6706
during debugging a @acronym{DFA} description.  If you see too many
6707
generated states, you could interrupt the generator of the pipeline
6708
hazard recognizer and try to figure out a reason for generation of the
6709
huge automaton.
6710
@end itemize
6711
 
6712
As an example, consider a superscalar @acronym{RISC} machine which can
6713
issue three insns (two integer insns and one floating point insn) on
6714
the cycle but can finish only two insns.  To describe this, we define
6715
the following functional units.
6716
 
6717
@smallexample
6718
(define_cpu_unit "i0_pipeline, i1_pipeline, f_pipeline")
6719
(define_cpu_unit "port0, port1")
6720
@end smallexample
6721
 
6722
All simple integer insns can be executed in any integer pipeline and
6723
their result is ready in two cycles.  The simple integer insns are
6724
issued into the first pipeline unless it is reserved, otherwise they
6725
are issued into the second pipeline.  Integer division and
6726
multiplication insns can be executed only in the second integer
6727
pipeline and their results are ready correspondingly in 8 and 4
6728
cycles.  The integer division is not pipelined, i.e.@: the subsequent
6729
integer division insn can not be issued until the current division
6730
insn finished.  Floating point insns are fully pipelined and their
6731
results are ready in 3 cycles.  Where the result of a floating point
6732
insn is used by an integer insn, an additional delay of one cycle is
6733
incurred.  To describe all of this we could specify
6734
 
6735
@smallexample
6736
(define_cpu_unit "div")
6737
 
6738
(define_insn_reservation "simple" 2 (eq_attr "type" "int")
6739
                         "(i0_pipeline | i1_pipeline), (port0 | port1)")
6740
 
6741
(define_insn_reservation "mult" 4 (eq_attr "type" "mult")
6742
                         "i1_pipeline, nothing*2, (port0 | port1)")
6743
 
6744
(define_insn_reservation "div" 8 (eq_attr "type" "div")
6745
                         "i1_pipeline, div*7, div + (port0 | port1)")
6746
 
6747
(define_insn_reservation "float" 3 (eq_attr "type" "float")
6748
                         "f_pipeline, nothing, (port0 | port1))
6749
 
6750
(define_bypass 4 "float" "simple,mult,div")
6751
@end smallexample
6752
 
6753
To simplify the description we could describe the following reservation
6754
 
6755
@smallexample
6756
(define_reservation "finish" "port0|port1")
6757
@end smallexample
6758
 
6759
and use it in all @code{define_insn_reservation} as in the following
6760
construction
6761
 
6762
@smallexample
6763
(define_insn_reservation "simple" 2 (eq_attr "type" "int")
6764
                         "(i0_pipeline | i1_pipeline), finish")
6765
@end smallexample
6766
 
6767
 
6768
@end ifset
6769
@ifset INTERNALS
6770
@node Conditional Execution
6771
@section Conditional Execution
6772
@cindex conditional execution
6773
@cindex predication
6774
 
6775
A number of architectures provide for some form of conditional
6776
execution, or predication.  The hallmark of this feature is the
6777
ability to nullify most of the instructions in the instruction set.
6778
When the instruction set is large and not entirely symmetric, it
6779
can be quite tedious to describe these forms directly in the
6780
@file{.md} file.  An alternative is the @code{define_cond_exec} template.
6781
 
6782
@findex define_cond_exec
6783
@smallexample
6784
(define_cond_exec
6785
  [@var{predicate-pattern}]
6786
  "@var{condition}"
6787
  "@var{output-template}")
6788
@end smallexample
6789
 
6790
@var{predicate-pattern} is the condition that must be true for the
6791
insn to be executed at runtime and should match a relational operator.
6792
One can use @code{match_operator} to match several relational operators
6793
at once.  Any @code{match_operand} operands must have no more than one
6794
alternative.
6795
 
6796
@var{condition} is a C expression that must be true for the generated
6797
pattern to match.
6798
 
6799
@findex current_insn_predicate
6800
@var{output-template} is a string similar to the @code{define_insn}
6801
output template (@pxref{Output Template}), except that the @samp{*}
6802
and @samp{@@} special cases do not apply.  This is only useful if the
6803
assembly text for the predicate is a simple prefix to the main insn.
6804
In order to handle the general case, there is a global variable
6805
@code{current_insn_predicate} that will contain the entire predicate
6806
if the current insn is predicated, and will otherwise be @code{NULL}.
6807
 
6808
When @code{define_cond_exec} is used, an implicit reference to
6809
the @code{predicable} instruction attribute is made.
6810
@xref{Insn Attributes}.  This attribute must be boolean (i.e.@: have
6811
exactly two elements in its @var{list-of-values}).  Further, it must
6812
not be used with complex expressions.  That is, the default and all
6813
uses in the insns must be a simple constant, not dependent on the
6814
alternative or anything else.
6815
 
6816
For each @code{define_insn} for which the @code{predicable}
6817
attribute is true, a new @code{define_insn} pattern will be
6818
generated that matches a predicated version of the instruction.
6819
For example,
6820
 
6821
@smallexample
6822
(define_insn "addsi"
6823
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "r")
6824
        (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "register_operand" "r")
6825
                 (match_operand:SI 2 "register_operand" "r")))]
6826
  "@var{test1}"
6827
  "add %2,%1,%0")
6828
 
6829
(define_cond_exec
6830
  [(ne (match_operand:CC 0 "register_operand" "c")
6831
       (const_int 0))]
6832
  "@var{test2}"
6833
  "(%0)")
6834
@end smallexample
6835
 
6836
@noindent
6837
generates a new pattern
6838
 
6839
@smallexample
6840
(define_insn ""
6841
  [(cond_exec
6842
     (ne (match_operand:CC 3 "register_operand" "c") (const_int 0))
6843
     (set (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "r")
6844
          (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "register_operand" "r")
6845
                   (match_operand:SI 2 "register_operand" "r"))))]
6846
  "(@var{test2}) && (@var{test1})"
6847
  "(%3) add %2,%1,%0")
6848
@end smallexample
6849
 
6850
@end ifset
6851
@ifset INTERNALS
6852
@node Constant Definitions
6853
@section Constant Definitions
6854
@cindex constant definitions
6855
@findex define_constants
6856
 
6857
Using literal constants inside instruction patterns reduces legibility and
6858
can be a maintenance problem.
6859
 
6860
To overcome this problem, you may use the @code{define_constants}
6861
expression.  It contains a vector of name-value pairs.  From that
6862
point on, wherever any of the names appears in the MD file, it is as
6863
if the corresponding value had been written instead.  You may use
6864
@code{define_constants} multiple times; each appearance adds more
6865
constants to the table.  It is an error to redefine a constant with
6866
a different value.
6867
 
6868
To come back to the a29k load multiple example, instead of
6869
 
6870
@smallexample
6871
(define_insn ""
6872
  [(match_parallel 0 "load_multiple_operation"
6873
     [(set (match_operand:SI 1 "gpc_reg_operand" "=r")
6874
           (match_operand:SI 2 "memory_operand" "m"))
6875
      (use (reg:SI 179))
6876
      (clobber (reg:SI 179))])]
6877
  ""
6878
  "loadm 0,0,%1,%2")
6879
@end smallexample
6880
 
6881
You could write:
6882
 
6883
@smallexample
6884
(define_constants [
6885
    (R_BP 177)
6886
    (R_FC 178)
6887
    (R_CR 179)
6888
    (R_Q  180)
6889
])
6890
 
6891
(define_insn ""
6892
  [(match_parallel 0 "load_multiple_operation"
6893
     [(set (match_operand:SI 1 "gpc_reg_operand" "=r")
6894
           (match_operand:SI 2 "memory_operand" "m"))
6895
      (use (reg:SI R_CR))
6896
      (clobber (reg:SI R_CR))])]
6897
  ""
6898
  "loadm 0,0,%1,%2")
6899
@end smallexample
6900
 
6901
The constants that are defined with a define_constant are also output
6902
in the insn-codes.h header file as #defines.
6903
@end ifset
6904
@ifset INTERNALS
6905
@node Macros
6906
@section Macros
6907
@cindex macros in @file{.md} files
6908
 
6909
Ports often need to define similar patterns for more than one machine
6910
mode or for more than one rtx code.  GCC provides some simple macro
6911
facilities to make this process easier.
6912
 
6913
@menu
6914
* Mode Macros::         Generating variations of patterns for different modes.
6915
* Code Macros::         Doing the same for codes.
6916
@end menu
6917
 
6918
@node Mode Macros
6919
@subsection Mode Macros
6920
@cindex mode macros in @file{.md} files
6921
 
6922
Ports often need to define similar patterns for two or more different modes.
6923
For example:
6924
 
6925
@itemize @bullet
6926
@item
6927
If a processor has hardware support for both single and double
6928
floating-point arithmetic, the @code{SFmode} patterns tend to be
6929
very similar to the @code{DFmode} ones.
6930
 
6931
@item
6932
If a port uses @code{SImode} pointers in one configuration and
6933
@code{DImode} pointers in another, it will usually have very similar
6934
@code{SImode} and @code{DImode} patterns for manipulating pointers.
6935
@end itemize
6936
 
6937
Mode macros allow several patterns to be instantiated from one
6938
@file{.md} file template.  They can be used with any type of
6939
rtx-based construct, such as a @code{define_insn},
6940
@code{define_split}, or @code{define_peephole2}.
6941
 
6942
@menu
6943
* Defining Mode Macros:: Defining a new mode macro.
6944
* Substitutions::        Combining mode macros with substitutions
6945
* Examples::             Examples
6946
@end menu
6947
 
6948
@node Defining Mode Macros
6949
@subsubsection Defining Mode Macros
6950
@findex define_mode_macro
6951
 
6952
The syntax for defining a mode macro is:
6953
 
6954
@smallexample
6955
(define_mode_macro @var{name} [(@var{mode1} "@var{cond1}") ... (@var{moden} "@var{condn}")])
6956
@end smallexample
6957
 
6958
This allows subsequent @file{.md} file constructs to use the mode suffix
6959
@code{:@var{name}}.  Every construct that does so will be expanded
6960
@var{n} times, once with every use of @code{:@var{name}} replaced by
6961
@code{:@var{mode1}}, once with every use replaced by @code{:@var{mode2}},
6962
and so on.  In the expansion for a particular @var{modei}, every
6963
C condition will also require that @var{condi} be true.
6964
 
6965
For example:
6966
 
6967
@smallexample
6968
(define_mode_macro P [(SI "Pmode == SImode") (DI "Pmode == DImode")])
6969
@end smallexample
6970
 
6971
defines a new mode suffix @code{:P}.  Every construct that uses
6972
@code{:P} will be expanded twice, once with every @code{:P} replaced
6973
by @code{:SI} and once with every @code{:P} replaced by @code{:DI}.
6974
The @code{:SI} version will only apply if @code{Pmode == SImode} and
6975
the @code{:DI} version will only apply if @code{Pmode == DImode}.
6976
 
6977
As with other @file{.md} conditions, an empty string is treated
6978
as ``always true''.  @code{(@var{mode} "")} can also be abbreviated
6979
to @code{@var{mode}}.  For example:
6980
 
6981
@smallexample
6982
(define_mode_macro GPR [SI (DI "TARGET_64BIT")])
6983
@end smallexample
6984
 
6985
means that the @code{:DI} expansion only applies if @code{TARGET_64BIT}
6986
but that the @code{:SI} expansion has no such constraint.
6987
 
6988
Macros are applied in the order they are defined.  This can be
6989
significant if two macros are used in a construct that requires
6990
substitutions.  @xref{Substitutions}.
6991
 
6992
@node Substitutions
6993
@subsubsection Substitution in Mode Macros
6994
@findex define_mode_attr
6995
 
6996
If an @file{.md} file construct uses mode macros, each version of the
6997
construct will often need slightly different strings or modes.  For
6998
example:
6999
 
7000
@itemize @bullet
7001
@item
7002
When a @code{define_expand} defines several @code{add@var{m}3} patterns
7003
(@pxref{Standard Names}), each expander will need to use the
7004
appropriate mode name for @var{m}.
7005
 
7006
@item
7007
When a @code{define_insn} defines several instruction patterns,
7008
each instruction will often use a different assembler mnemonic.
7009
 
7010
@item
7011
When a @code{define_insn} requires operands with different modes,
7012
using a macro for one of the operand modes usually requires a specific
7013
mode for the other operand(s).
7014
@end itemize
7015
 
7016
GCC supports such variations through a system of ``mode attributes''.
7017
There are two standard attributes: @code{mode}, which is the name of
7018
the mode in lower case, and @code{MODE}, which is the same thing in
7019
upper case.  You can define other attributes using:
7020
 
7021
@smallexample
7022
(define_mode_attr @var{name} [(@var{mode1} "@var{value1}") ... (@var{moden} "@var{valuen}")])
7023
@end smallexample
7024
 
7025
where @var{name} is the name of the attribute and @var{valuei}
7026
is the value associated with @var{modei}.
7027
 
7028
When GCC replaces some @var{:macro} with @var{:mode}, it will scan
7029
each string and mode in the pattern for sequences of the form
7030
@code{<@var{macro}:@var{attr}>}, where @var{attr} is the name of a
7031
mode attribute.  If the attribute is defined for @var{mode}, the whole
7032
@code{<...>} sequence will be replaced by the appropriate attribute
7033
value.
7034
 
7035
For example, suppose an @file{.md} file has:
7036
 
7037
@smallexample
7038
(define_mode_macro P [(SI "Pmode == SImode") (DI "Pmode == DImode")])
7039
(define_mode_attr load [(SI "lw") (DI "ld")])
7040
@end smallexample
7041
 
7042
If one of the patterns that uses @code{:P} contains the string
7043
@code{"<P:load>\t%0,%1"}, the @code{SI} version of that pattern
7044
will use @code{"lw\t%0,%1"} and the @code{DI} version will use
7045
@code{"ld\t%0,%1"}.
7046
 
7047
Here is an example of using an attribute for a mode:
7048
 
7049
@smallexample
7050
(define_mode_macro LONG [SI DI])
7051
(define_mode_attr SHORT [(SI "HI") (DI "SI")])
7052
(define_insn ...
7053
  (sign_extend:LONG (match_operand:<LONG:SHORT> ...)) ...)
7054
@end smallexample
7055
 
7056
The @code{@var{macro}:} prefix may be omitted, in which case the
7057
substitution will be attempted for every macro expansion.
7058
 
7059
@node Examples
7060
@subsubsection Mode Macro Examples
7061
 
7062
Here is an example from the MIPS port.  It defines the following
7063
modes and attributes (among others):
7064
 
7065
@smallexample
7066
(define_mode_macro GPR [SI (DI "TARGET_64BIT")])
7067
(define_mode_attr d [(SI "") (DI "d")])
7068
@end smallexample
7069
 
7070
and uses the following template to define both @code{subsi3}
7071
and @code{subdi3}:
7072
 
7073
@smallexample
7074
(define_insn "sub<mode>3"
7075
  [(set (match_operand:GPR 0 "register_operand" "=d")
7076
        (minus:GPR (match_operand:GPR 1 "register_operand" "d")
7077
                   (match_operand:GPR 2 "register_operand" "d")))]
7078
  ""
7079
  "<d>subu\t%0,%1,%2"
7080
  [(set_attr "type" "arith")
7081
   (set_attr "mode" "<MODE>")])
7082
@end smallexample
7083
 
7084
This is exactly equivalent to:
7085
 
7086
@smallexample
7087
(define_insn "subsi3"
7088
  [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "=d")
7089
        (minus:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "register_operand" "d")
7090
                  (match_operand:SI 2 "register_operand" "d")))]
7091
  ""
7092
  "subu\t%0,%1,%2"
7093
  [(set_attr "type" "arith")
7094
   (set_attr "mode" "SI")])
7095
 
7096
(define_insn "subdi3"
7097
  [(set (match_operand:DI 0 "register_operand" "=d")
7098
        (minus:DI (match_operand:DI 1 "register_operand" "d")
7099
                  (match_operand:DI 2 "register_operand" "d")))]
7100
  ""
7101
  "dsubu\t%0,%1,%2"
7102
  [(set_attr "type" "arith")
7103
   (set_attr "mode" "DI")])
7104
@end smallexample
7105
 
7106
@node Code Macros
7107
@subsection Code Macros
7108
@cindex code macros in @file{.md} files
7109
@findex define_code_macro
7110
@findex define_code_attr
7111
 
7112
Code macros operate in a similar way to mode macros.  @xref{Mode Macros}.
7113
 
7114
The construct:
7115
 
7116
@smallexample
7117
(define_code_macro @var{name} [(@var{code1} "@var{cond1}") ... (@var{coden} "@var{condn}")])
7118
@end smallexample
7119
 
7120
defines a pseudo rtx code @var{name} that can be instantiated as
7121
@var{codei} if condition @var{condi} is true.  Each @var{codei}
7122
must have the same rtx format.  @xref{RTL Classes}.
7123
 
7124
As with mode macros, each pattern that uses @var{name} will be
7125
expanded @var{n} times, once with all uses of @var{name} replaced by
7126
@var{code1}, once with all uses replaced by @var{code2}, and so on.
7127
@xref{Defining Mode Macros}.
7128
 
7129
It is possible to define attributes for codes as well as for modes.
7130
There are two standard code attributes: @code{code}, the name of the
7131
code in lower case, and @code{CODE}, the name of the code in upper case.
7132
Other attributes are defined using:
7133
 
7134
@smallexample
7135
(define_code_attr @var{name} [(@var{code1} "@var{value1}") ... (@var{coden} "@var{valuen}")])
7136
@end smallexample
7137
 
7138
Here's an example of code macros in action, taken from the MIPS port:
7139
 
7140
@smallexample
7141
(define_code_macro any_cond [unordered ordered unlt unge uneq ltgt unle ungt
7142
                             eq ne gt ge lt le gtu geu ltu leu])
7143
 
7144
(define_expand "b<code>"
7145
  [(set (pc)
7146
        (if_then_else (any_cond:CC (cc0)
7147
                                   (const_int 0))
7148
                      (label_ref (match_operand 0 ""))
7149
                      (pc)))]
7150
  ""
7151
@{
7152
  gen_conditional_branch (operands, <CODE>);
7153
  DONE;
7154
@})
7155
@end smallexample
7156
 
7157
This is equivalent to:
7158
 
7159
@smallexample
7160
(define_expand "bunordered"
7161
  [(set (pc)
7162
        (if_then_else (unordered:CC (cc0)
7163
                                    (const_int 0))
7164
                      (label_ref (match_operand 0 ""))
7165
                      (pc)))]
7166
  ""
7167
@{
7168
  gen_conditional_branch (operands, UNORDERED);
7169
  DONE;
7170
@})
7171
 
7172
(define_expand "bordered"
7173
  [(set (pc)
7174
        (if_then_else (ordered:CC (cc0)
7175
                                  (const_int 0))
7176
                      (label_ref (match_operand 0 ""))
7177
                      (pc)))]
7178
  ""
7179
@{
7180
  gen_conditional_branch (operands, ORDERED);
7181
  DONE;
7182
@})
7183
 
7184
...
7185
@end smallexample
7186
 
7187
@end ifset

powered by: WebSVN 2.1.0

© copyright 1999-2024 OpenCores.org, equivalent to Oliscience, all rights reserved. OpenCores®, registered trademark.